diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'runtime/doc/builtin.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | runtime/doc/builtin.txt | 10873 |
1 files changed, 10873 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/runtime/doc/builtin.txt b/runtime/doc/builtin.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a695547 --- /dev/null +++ b/runtime/doc/builtin.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10873 @@ +*builtin.txt* For Vim version 9.0. Last change: 2023 Feb 27 + + + VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar + + +Builtin functions *builtin-functions* + +Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time, the builtin +functions are not available then. See |+eval| and |no-eval-feature|. + +For functions grouped by what they are used for see |function-list|. + +1. Overview |builtin-function-list| +2. Details |builtin-function-details| +3. Feature list |feature-list| +4. Matching a pattern in a String |string-match| + +============================================================================== +1. Overview *builtin-function-list* + +Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation. + +USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~ + +abs({expr}) Float or Number absolute value of {expr} +acos({expr}) Float arc cosine of {expr} +add({object}, {item}) List/Blob append {item} to {object} +and({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise AND +append({lnum}, {text}) Number append {text} below line {lnum} +appendbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text}) + Number append {text} below line {lnum} + in buffer {expr} +argc([{winid}]) Number number of files in the argument list +argidx() Number current index in the argument list +arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) Number argument list id +argv({nr} [, {winid}]) String {nr} entry of the argument list +argv([-1, {winid}]) List the argument list +asin({expr}) Float arc sine of {expr} +assert_beeps({cmd}) Number assert {cmd} causes a beep +assert_equal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}]) + Number assert {exp} is equal to {act} +assert_equalfile({fname-one}, {fname-two} [, {msg}]) + Number assert file contents are equal +assert_exception({error} [, {msg}]) + Number assert {error} is in v:exception +assert_fails({cmd} [, {error} [, {msg} [, {lnum} [, {context}]]]]) + Number assert {cmd} fails +assert_false({actual} [, {msg}]) + Number assert {actual} is false +assert_inrange({lower}, {upper}, {actual} [, {msg}]) + Number assert {actual} is inside the range +assert_match({pat}, {text} [, {msg}]) + Number assert {pat} matches {text} +assert_nobeep({cmd}) Number assert {cmd} does not cause a beep +assert_notequal({exp}, {act} [, {msg}]) + Number assert {exp} is not equal {act} +assert_notmatch({pat}, {text} [, {msg}]) + Number assert {pat} not matches {text} +assert_report({msg}) Number report a test failure +assert_true({actual} [, {msg}]) Number assert {actual} is true +atan({expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr} +atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) Float arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2} +autocmd_add({acmds}) Bool add a list of autocmds and groups +autocmd_delete({acmds}) Bool delete a list of autocmds and groups +autocmd_get([{opts}]) List return a list of autocmds +balloon_gettext() String current text in the balloon +balloon_show({expr}) none show {expr} inside the balloon +balloon_split({msg}) List split {msg} as used for a balloon +blob2list({blob}) List convert {blob} into a list of numbers +browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) + String put up a file requester +browsedir({title}, {initdir}) String put up a directory requester +bufadd({name}) Number add a buffer to the buffer list +bufexists({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} exists +buflisted({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} is listed +bufload({buf}) Number load buffer {buf} if not loaded yet +bufloaded({buf}) Number |TRUE| if buffer {buf} is loaded +bufname([{buf}]) String Name of the buffer {buf} +bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]]) Number Number of the buffer {buf} +bufwinid({buf}) Number window ID of buffer {buf} +bufwinnr({buf}) Number window number of buffer {buf} +byte2line({byte}) Number line number at byte count {byte} +byteidx({expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr} +byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr} +call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) + any call {func} with arguments {arglist} +ceil({expr}) Float round {expr} up +ch_canread({handle}) Number check if there is something to read +ch_close({handle}) none close {handle} +ch_close_in({handle}) none close in part of {handle} +ch_evalexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}]) + any evaluate {expr} on JSON {handle} +ch_evalraw({handle}, {string} [, {options}]) + any evaluate {string} on raw {handle} +ch_getbufnr({handle}, {what}) Number get buffer number for {handle}/{what} +ch_getjob({channel}) Job get the Job of {channel} +ch_info({handle}) String info about channel {handle} +ch_log({msg} [, {handle}]) none write {msg} in the channel log file +ch_logfile({fname} [, {mode}]) none start logging channel activity +ch_open({address} [, {options}]) + Channel open a channel to {address} +ch_read({handle} [, {options}]) String read from {handle} +ch_readblob({handle} [, {options}]) + Blob read Blob from {handle} +ch_readraw({handle} [, {options}]) + String read raw from {handle} +ch_sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {options}]) + any send {expr} over JSON {handle} +ch_sendraw({handle}, {expr} [, {options}]) + any send {expr} over raw {handle} +ch_setoptions({handle}, {options}) + none set options for {handle} +ch_status({handle} [, {options}]) + String status of channel {handle} +changenr() Number current change number +char2nr({expr} [, {utf8}]) Number ASCII/UTF-8 value of first char in {expr} +charclass({string}) Number character class of {string} +charcol({expr} [, {winid}]) Number column number of cursor or mark +charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc}]) + Number char index of byte {idx} in {string} +chdir({dir}) String change current working directory +cindent({lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum} +clearmatches([{win}]) none clear all matches +col({expr} [, {winid}]) Number column byte index of cursor or mark +complete({startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion +complete_add({expr}) Number add completion match +complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion +complete_info([{what}]) Dict get current completion information +confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) + Number number of choice picked by user +copy({expr}) any make a shallow copy of {expr} +cos({expr}) Float cosine of {expr} +cosh({expr}) Float hyperbolic cosine of {expr} +count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) + Number count how many {expr} are in {comp} +cscope_connection([{num}, {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) + Number checks existence of cscope connection +cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) + Number move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {off} +cursor({list}) Number move cursor to position in {list} +debugbreak({pid}) Number interrupt process being debugged +deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}]) any make a full copy of {expr} +delete({fname} [, {flags}]) Number delete the file or directory {fname} +deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}]) + Number delete lines from buffer {buf} +did_filetype() Number |TRUE| if FileType autocmd event used +diff_filler({lnum}) Number diff filler lines about {lnum} +diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) Number diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col} +digraph_get({chars}) String get the |digraph| of {chars} +digraph_getlist([{listall}]) List get all |digraph|s +digraph_set({chars}, {digraph}) Boolean register |digraph| +digraph_setlist({digraphlist}) Boolean register multiple |digraph|s +echoraw({expr}) none output {expr} as-is +empty({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is empty +environ() Dict return environment variables +escape({string}, {chars}) String escape {chars} in {string} with '\' +eval({string}) any evaluate {string} into its value +eventhandler() Number |TRUE| if inside an event handler +executable({expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists +execute({command}) String execute {command} and get the output +exepath({expr}) String full path of the command {expr} +exists({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} exists +exists_compiled({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} exists at compile time +exp({expr}) Float exponential of {expr} +expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) + any expand special keywords in {expr} +expandcmd({string} [, {options}]) + String expand {string} like with `:edit` +extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) + List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1} +extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) + List/Dict like |extend()| but creates a new + List or Dictionary +feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer +filereadable({file}) Number |TRUE| if {file} is a readable file +filewritable({file}) Number |TRUE| if {file} is a writable file +filter({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String + remove items from {expr1} where + {expr2} is 0 +finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) + String find directory {name} in {path} +findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) + String find file {name} in {path} +flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}]) List flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels +flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}]) + List flatten a copy of {list} +float2nr({expr}) Number convert Float {expr} to a Number +floor({expr}) Float round {expr} down +fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) Float remainder of {expr1} / {expr2} +fnameescape({fname}) String escape special characters in {fname} +fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) String modify file name +foldclosed({lnum}) Number first line of fold at {lnum} if closed +foldclosedend({lnum}) Number last line of fold at {lnum} if closed +foldlevel({lnum}) Number fold level at {lnum} +foldtext() String line displayed for closed fold +foldtextresult({lnum}) String text for closed fold at {lnum} +foreground() Number bring the Vim window to the foreground +fullcommand({name} [, {vim9}]) String get full command from {name} +funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) + Funcref reference to function {name} +function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) + Funcref named reference to function {name} +garbagecollect([{atexit}]) none free memory, breaking cyclic references +get({list}, {idx} [, {def}]) any get item {idx} from {list} or {def} +get({dict}, {key} [, {def}]) any get item {key} from {dict} or {def} +get({func}, {what}) any get property of funcref/partial {func} +getbufinfo([{buf}]) List information about buffers +getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}]) + List lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {buf} +getbufoneline({buf}, {lnum}) String line {lnum} of buffer {buf} +getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}]) + any variable {varname} in buffer {buf} +getcellwidths() List get character cell width overrides +getchangelist([{buf}]) List list of change list items +getchar([expr]) Number or String + get one character from the user +getcharmod() Number modifiers for the last typed character +getcharpos({expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc. +getcharsearch() Dict last character search +getcharstr([expr]) String get one character from the user +getcmdcompltype() String return the type of the current + command-line completion +getcmdline() String return the current command-line +getcmdpos() Number return cursor position in command-line +getcmdscreenpos() Number return cursor screen position in + command-line +getcmdtype() String return current command-line type +getcmdwintype() String return current command-line window type +getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}]) + List list of cmdline completion matches +getcurpos([{winnr}]) List position of the cursor +getcursorcharpos([{winnr}]) List character position of the cursor +getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) String get the current working directory +getenv({name}) String return environment variable +getfontname([{name}]) String name of font being used +getfperm({fname}) String file permissions of file {fname} +getfsize({fname}) Number size in bytes of file {fname} +getftime({fname}) Number last modification time of file +getftype({fname}) String description of type of file {fname} +getimstatus() Number |TRUE| if the IME status is active +getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) + List list of jump list items +getline({lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer +getline({lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer +getloclist({nr}) List list of location list items +getloclist({nr}, {what}) Dict get specific location list properties +getmarklist([{buf}]) List list of global/local marks +getmatches([{win}]) List list of current matches +getmousepos() Dict last known mouse position +getmouseshape() String current mouse shape name +getpid() Number process ID of Vim +getpos({expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc. +getqflist() List list of quickfix items +getqflist({what}) Dict get specific quickfix list properties +getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]]) + String or List contents of a register +getreginfo([{regname}]) Dict information about a register +getregtype([{regname}]) String type of a register +getscriptinfo([{opts}]) List list of sourced scripts +gettabinfo([{expr}]) List list of tab pages +gettabvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}]) + any variable {varname} in tab {nr} or {def} +gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {name} [, {def}]) + any {name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} +gettagstack([{nr}]) Dict get the tag stack of window {nr} +gettext({text}) String lookup translation of {text} +getwininfo([{winid}]) List list of info about each window +getwinpos([{timeout}]) List X and Y coord in pixels of Vim window +getwinposx() Number X coord in pixels of the Vim window +getwinposy() Number Y coord in pixels of the Vim window +getwinvar({nr}, {varname} [, {def}]) + any variable {varname} in window {nr} +glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) + any expand file wildcards in {expr} +glob2regpat({expr}) String convert a glob pat into a search pat +globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) + String do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path} +has({feature} [, {check}]) Number |TRUE| if feature {feature} supported +has_key({dict}, {key}) Number |TRUE| if {dict} has entry {key} +haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) + Number |TRUE| if the window executed |:lcd| + or |:tcd| +hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) + Number |TRUE| if mapping to {what} exists +histadd({history}, {item}) Number add an item to a history +histdel({history} [, {item}]) Number remove an item from a history +histget({history} [, {index}]) String get the item {index} from a history +histnr({history}) Number highest index of a history +hlID({name}) Number syntax ID of highlight group {name} +hlexists({name}) Number |TRUE| if highlight group {name} exists +hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]]) List get highlight group attributes +hlset({list}) Number set highlight group attributes +hostname() String name of the machine Vim is running on +iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) String convert encoding of {expr} +indent({lnum}) Number indent of line {lnum} +index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) + Number index in {object} where {expr} appears +indexof({object}, {expr} [, {opts}]]) + Number index in {object} where {expr} is true +input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) + String get input from the user +inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) + String like input() but in a GUI dialog +inputlist({textlist}) Number let the user pick from a choice list +inputrestore() Number restore typeahead +inputsave() Number save and clear typeahead +inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) String like input() but hiding the text +insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) List insert {item} in {object} [before {idx}] +interrupt() none interrupt script execution +invert({expr}) Number bitwise invert +isabsolutepath({path}) Number |TRUE| if {path} is an absolute path +isdirectory({directory}) Number |TRUE| if {directory} is a directory +isinf({expr}) Number determine if {expr} is infinity value + (positive or negative) +islocked({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is locked +isnan({expr}) Number |TRUE| if {expr} is NaN +items({dict}) List key-value pairs in {dict} +job_getchannel({job}) Channel get the channel handle for {job} +job_info([{job}]) Dict get information about {job} +job_setoptions({job}, {options}) none set options for {job} +job_start({command} [, {options}]) + Job start a job +job_status({job}) String get the status of {job} +job_stop({job} [, {how}]) Number stop {job} +join({list} [, {sep}]) String join {list} items into one String +js_decode({string}) any decode JS style JSON +js_encode({expr}) String encode JS style JSON +json_decode({string}) any decode JSON +json_encode({expr}) String encode JSON +keys({dict}) List keys in {dict} +keytrans({string}) String translate internal keycodes to a form + that can be used by |:map| +len({expr}) Number the length of {expr} +libcall({lib}, {func}, {arg}) String call {func} in library {lib} with {arg} +libcallnr({lib}, {func}, {arg}) Number idem, but return a Number +line({expr} [, {winid}]) Number line nr of cursor, last line or mark +line2byte({lnum}) Number byte count of line {lnum} +lispindent({lnum}) Number Lisp indent for line {lnum} +list2blob({list}) Blob turn {list} of numbers into a Blob +list2str({list} [, {utf8}]) String turn {list} of numbers into a String +listener_add({callback} [, {buf}]) + Number add a callback to listen to changes +listener_flush([{buf}]) none invoke listener callbacks +listener_remove({id}) none remove a listener callback +localtime() Number current time +log({expr}) Float natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} +log10({expr}) Float logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 +luaeval({expr} [, {expr}]) any evaluate |Lua| expression +map({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String + change each item in {expr1} to {expr2} +maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) + String or Dict + rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode} +mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) + String check for mappings matching {name} +maplist([{abbr}]) List list of all mappings, a dict for each +mapnew({expr1}, {expr2}) List/Dict/Blob/String + like |map()| but creates a new List or + Dictionary +mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict}) none restore mapping from |maparg()| result +match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) + Number position where {pat} matches in {expr} +matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) + Number highlight {pattern} with {group} +matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) + Number highlight positions with {group} +matcharg({nr}) List arguments of |:match| +matchdelete({id} [, {win}]) Number delete match identified by {id} +matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) + Number position where {pat} ends in {expr} +matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) + List fuzzy match {str} in {list} +matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) + List fuzzy match {str} in {list} +matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) + List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr} +matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) + String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr} +matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) + List {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr} +max({expr}) Number maximum value of items in {expr} +menu_info({name} [, {mode}]) Dict get menu item information +min({expr}) Number minimum value of items in {expr} +mkdir({name} [, {flags} [, {prot}]]) + Number create directory {name} +mode([expr]) String current editing mode +mzeval({expr}) any evaluate |MzScheme| expression +nextnonblank({lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum} +nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}]) String single char with ASCII/UTF-8 value {expr} +or({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise OR +pathshorten({expr} [, {len}]) String shorten directory names in a path +perleval({expr}) any evaluate |Perl| expression +popup_atcursor({what}, {options}) Number create popup window near the cursor +popup_beval({what}, {options}) Number create popup window for 'ballooneval' +popup_clear() none close all popup windows +popup_close({id} [, {result}]) none close popup window {id} +popup_create({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window +popup_dialog({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window used as a dialog +popup_filter_menu({id}, {key}) Number filter for a menu popup window +popup_filter_yesno({id}, {key}) Number filter for a dialog popup window +popup_findecho() Number get window ID of popup for `:echowin` +popup_findinfo() Number get window ID of info popup window +popup_findpreview() Number get window ID of preview popup window +popup_getoptions({id}) Dict get options of popup window {id} +popup_getpos({id}) Dict get position of popup window {id} +popup_hide({id}) none hide popup menu {id} +popup_list() List get a list of window IDs of all popups +popup_locate({row}, {col}) Number get window ID of popup at position +popup_menu({what}, {options}) Number create a popup window used as a menu +popup_move({id}, {options}) none set position of popup window {id} +popup_notification({what}, {options}) + Number create a notification popup window +popup_setoptions({id}, {options}) + none set options for popup window {id} +popup_settext({id}, {text}) none set the text of popup window {id} +popup_show({id}) none unhide popup window {id} +pow({x}, {y}) Float {x} to the power of {y} +prevnonblank({lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum} +printf({fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text +prompt_getprompt({buf}) String get prompt text +prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) none set prompt callback function +prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {text}) none set prompt interrupt function +prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) none set prompt text +prop_add({lnum}, {col}, {props}) none add one text property +prop_add_list({props}, [[{lnum}, {col}, {end-lnum}, {end-col}], ...]) + none add multiple text properties +prop_clear({lnum} [, {lnum-end} [, {props}]]) + none remove all text properties +prop_find({props} [, {direction}]) + Dict search for a text property +prop_list({lnum} [, {props}]) List text properties in {lnum} +prop_remove({props} [, {lnum} [, {lnum-end}]]) + Number remove a text property +prop_type_add({name}, {props}) none define a new property type +prop_type_change({name}, {props}) + none change an existing property type +prop_type_delete({name} [, {props}]) + none delete a property type +prop_type_get({name} [, {props}]) + Dict get property type values +prop_type_list([{props}]) List get list of property types +pum_getpos() Dict position and size of pum if visible +pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible +py3eval({expr}) any evaluate |python3| expression +pyeval({expr}) any evaluate |Python| expression +pyxeval({expr}) any evaluate |python_x| expression +rand([{expr}]) Number get pseudo-random number +range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) + List items from {expr} to {max} +readblob({fname} [, {offset} [, {size}]]) + Blob read a |Blob| from {fname} +readdir({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) + List file names in {dir} selected by {expr} +readdirex({dir} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) + List file info in {dir} selected by {expr} +readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]]) + List get list of lines from file {fname} +reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}]) + any reduce {object} using {func} +reg_executing() String get the executing register name +reg_recording() String get the recording register name +reltime([{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value +reltimefloat({time}) Float turn the time value into a Float +reltimestr({time}) String turn time value into a String +remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]]) + String send expression +remote_foreground({server}) Number bring Vim server to the foreground +remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) + Number check for reply string +remote_read({serverid} [, {timeout}]) + String read reply string +remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) + String send key sequence +remote_startserver({name}) none become server {name} +remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) any/List + remove items {idx}-{end} from {list} +remove({blob}, {idx} [, {end}]) Number/Blob + remove bytes {idx}-{end} from {blob} +remove({dict}, {key}) any remove entry {key} from {dict} +rename({from}, {to}) Number rename (move) file from {from} to {to} +repeat({expr}, {count}) List/Blob/String + repeat {expr} {count} times +resolve({filename}) String get filename a shortcut points to +reverse({list}) List reverse {list} in-place +round({expr}) Float round off {expr} +rubyeval({expr}) any evaluate |Ruby| expression +screenattr({row}, {col}) Number attribute at screen position +screenchar({row}, {col}) Number character at screen position +screenchars({row}, {col}) List List of characters at screen position +screencol() Number current cursor column +screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) Dict screen row and col of a text character +screenrow() Number current cursor row +screenstring({row}, {col}) String characters at screen position +search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) + Number search for {pattern} +searchcount([{options}]) Dict get or update search stats +searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) + Number search for variable declaration +searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) + Number search for other end of start/end pair +searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) + List search for other end of start/end pair +searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) + List search for {pattern} +server2client({clientid}, {string}) + Number send reply string +serverlist() String get a list of available servers +setbufline({expr}, {lnum}, {text}) + Number set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer + {expr} +setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val}) + none set {varname} in buffer {buf} to {val} +setcellwidths({list}) none set character cell width overrides +setcharpos({expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list} +setcharsearch({dict}) Dict set character search from {dict} +setcmdline({str} [, {pos}]) Number set command-line +setcmdpos({pos}) Number set cursor position in command-line +setcursorcharpos({list}) Number move cursor to position in {list} +setenv({name}, {val}) none set environment variable +setfperm({fname}, {mode}) Number set {fname} file permissions to {mode} +setline({lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line} +setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}]) + Number modify location list using {list} +setloclist({nr}, {list}, {action}, {what}) + Number modify specific location list props +setmatches({list} [, {win}]) Number restore a list of matches +setpos({expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list} +setqflist({list} [, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list} +setqflist({list}, {action}, {what}) + Number modify specific quickfix list props +setreg({n}, {v} [, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type +settabvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val} +settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) + none set {varname} in window {winnr} in tab + page {tabnr} to {val} +settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}]) + Number modify tag stack using {dict} +setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) none set {varname} in window {nr} to {val} +sha256({string}) String SHA256 checksum of {string} +shellescape({string} [, {special}]) + String escape {string} for use as shell + command argument +shiftwidth([{col}]) Number effective value of 'shiftwidth' +sign_define({name} [, {dict}]) Number define or update a sign +sign_define({list}) List define or update a list of signs +sign_getdefined([{name}]) List get a list of defined signs +sign_getplaced([{buf} [, {dict}]]) + List get a list of placed signs +sign_jump({id}, {group}, {buf}) + Number jump to a sign +sign_place({id}, {group}, {name}, {buf} [, {dict}]) + Number place a sign +sign_placelist({list}) List place a list of signs +sign_undefine([{name}]) Number undefine a sign +sign_undefine({list}) List undefine a list of signs +sign_unplace({group} [, {dict}]) + Number unplace a sign +sign_unplacelist({list}) List unplace a list of signs +simplify({filename}) String simplify filename as much as possible +sin({expr}) Float sine of {expr} +sinh({expr}) Float hyperbolic sine of {expr} +slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}]) String, List or Blob + slice of a String, List or Blob +sort({list} [, {how} [, {dict}]]) + List sort {list}, compare with {how} +sound_clear() none stop playing all sounds +sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}]) + Number play an event sound +sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}]) + Number play sound file {path} +sound_stop({id}) none stop playing sound {id} +soundfold({word}) String sound-fold {word} +spellbadword() String badly spelled word at cursor +spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) + List spelling suggestions +split({expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]]) + List make |List| from {pat} separated {expr} +sqrt({expr}) Float square root of {expr} +srand([{expr}]) List get seed for |rand()| +state([{what}]) String current state of Vim +str2float({expr} [, {quoted}]) Float convert String to Float +str2list({expr} [, {utf8}]) List convert each character of {expr} to + ASCII/UTF-8 value +str2nr({expr} [, {base} [, {quoted}]]) + Number convert String to Number +strcharlen({expr}) Number character length of the String {expr} +strcharpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]]) + String {len} characters of {str} at + character {start} +strchars({expr} [, {skipcc}]) Number character count of the String {expr} +strdisplaywidth({expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr} +strftime({format} [, {time}]) String format time with a specified format +strgetchar({str}, {index}) Number get char {index} from {str} +stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) + Number index of {needle} in {haystack} +string({expr}) String String representation of {expr} value +strlen({expr}) Number length of the String {expr} +strpart({str}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]]) + String {len} bytes/chars of {str} at + byte {start} +strptime({format}, {timestring}) + Number Convert {timestring} to unix timestamp +strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) + Number last index of {needle} in {haystack} +strtrans({expr}) String translate string to make it printable +strwidth({expr}) Number display cell length of the String {expr} +submatch({nr} [, {list}]) String or List + specific match in ":s" or substitute() +substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) + String all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub} +swapfilelist() List swap files found in 'directory' +swapinfo({fname}) Dict information about swap file {fname} +swapname({buf}) String swap file of buffer {buf} +synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col} +synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) + String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID} +synIDtrans({synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID} +synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) List info about concealing +synstack({lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col} +system({expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr} +systemlist({expr} [, {input}]) List output of shell command/filter {expr} +tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page +tabpagenr([{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page +tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) Number number of current window in tab page +tagfiles() List tags files used +taglist({expr} [, {filename}]) List list of tags matching {expr} +tan({expr}) Float tangent of {expr} +tanh({expr}) Float hyperbolic tangent of {expr} +tempname() String name for a temporary file +term_dumpdiff({filename}, {filename} [, {options}]) + Number display difference between two dumps +term_dumpload({filename} [, {options}]) + Number displaying a screen dump +term_dumpwrite({buf}, {filename} [, {options}]) + none dump terminal window contents +term_getaltscreen({buf}) Number get the alternate screen flag +term_getansicolors({buf}) List get ANSI palette in GUI color mode +term_getattr({attr}, {what}) Number get the value of attribute {what} +term_getcursor({buf}) List get the cursor position of a terminal +term_getjob({buf}) Job get the job associated with a terminal +term_getline({buf}, {row}) String get a line of text from a terminal +term_getscrolled({buf}) Number get the scroll count of a terminal +term_getsize({buf}) List get the size of a terminal +term_getstatus({buf}) String get the status of a terminal +term_gettitle({buf}) String get the title of a terminal +term_gettty({buf}, [{input}]) String get the tty name of a terminal +term_list() List get the list of terminal buffers +term_scrape({buf}, {row}) List get row of a terminal screen +term_sendkeys({buf}, {keys}) none send keystrokes to a terminal +term_setansicolors({buf}, {colors}) + none set ANSI palette in GUI color mode +term_setapi({buf}, {expr}) none set |terminal-api| function name prefix +term_setkill({buf}, {how}) none set signal to stop job in terminal +term_setrestore({buf}, {command}) none set command to restore terminal +term_setsize({buf}, {rows}, {cols}) + none set the size of a terminal +term_start({cmd} [, {options}]) Number open a terminal window and run a job +term_wait({buf} [, {time}]) Number wait for screen to be updated +terminalprops() Dict properties of the terminal +test_alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat}) + none make memory allocation fail +test_autochdir() none enable 'autochdir' during startup +test_feedinput({string}) none add key sequence to input buffer +test_garbagecollect_now() none free memory right now for testing +test_garbagecollect_soon() none free memory soon for testing +test_getvalue({string}) any get value of an internal variable +test_gui_event({event}, {args}) bool generate a GUI event for testing +test_ignore_error({expr}) none ignore a specific error +test_mswin_event({event}, {args}) + bool generate MS-Windows event for testing +test_null_blob() Blob null value for testing +test_null_channel() Channel null value for testing +test_null_dict() Dict null value for testing +test_null_function() Funcref null value for testing +test_null_job() Job null value for testing +test_null_list() List null value for testing +test_null_partial() Funcref null value for testing +test_null_string() String null value for testing +test_option_not_set({name}) none reset flag indicating option was set +test_override({expr}, {val}) none test with Vim internal overrides +test_refcount({expr}) Number get the reference count of {expr} +test_setmouse({row}, {col}) none set the mouse position for testing +test_settime({expr}) none set current time for testing +test_srand_seed([seed]) none set seed for testing srand() +test_unknown() any unknown value for testing +test_void() any void value for testing +timer_info([{id}]) List information about timers +timer_pause({id}, {pause}) none pause or unpause a timer +timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}]) + Number create a timer +timer_stop({timer}) none stop a timer +timer_stopall() none stop all timers +tolower({expr}) String the String {expr} switched to lowercase +toupper({expr}) String the String {expr} switched to uppercase +tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) String translate chars of {src} in {fromstr} + to chars in {tostr} +trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]]) + String trim characters in {mask} from {text} +trunc({expr}) Float truncate Float {expr} +type({expr}) Number type of value {expr} +typename({expr}) String representation of the type of {expr} +undofile({name}) String undo file name for {name} +undotree() List undo file tree +uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) + List remove adjacent duplicates from a list +values({dict}) List values in {dict} +virtcol({expr} [, {list}]) Number or List + screen column of cursor or mark +virtcol2col({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) + Number byte index of a character on screen +visualmode([expr]) String last visual mode used +wildmenumode() Number whether 'wildmenu' mode is active +win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}]) + String execute {command} in window {id} +win_findbuf({bufnr}) List find windows containing {bufnr} +win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]]) Number get window ID for {win} in {tab} +win_gettype([{nr}]) String type of window {nr} +win_gotoid({expr}) Number go to window with ID {expr} +win_id2tabwin({expr}) List get tab and window nr from window ID +win_id2win({expr}) Number get window nr from window ID +win_move_separator({nr}) Number move window vertical separator +win_move_statusline({nr}) Number move window status line +win_screenpos({nr}) List get screen position of window {nr} +win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}]) + Number move window {nr} to split of {target} +winbufnr({nr}) Number buffer number of window {nr} +wincol() Number window column of the cursor +windowsversion() String MS-Windows OS version +winheight({nr}) Number height of window {nr} +winlayout([{tabnr}]) List layout of windows in tab {tabnr} +winline() Number window line of the cursor +winnr([{expr}]) Number number of current window +winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes +winrestview({dict}) none restore view of current window +winsaveview() Dict save view of current window +winwidth({nr}) Number width of window {nr} +wordcount() Dict get byte/char/word statistics +writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}]) + Number write |Blob| or |List| of lines to file +xor({expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise XOR + +============================================================================== +2. Details *builtin-function-details* + +Not all functions are here, some have been moved to a help file covering the +specific functionality. + +abs({expr}) *abs()* + Return the absolute value of {expr}. When {expr} evaluates to + a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|. When {expr} can be + converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|. Otherwise + abs() gives an error message and returns -1. + Examples: > + echo abs(1.456) +< 1.456 > + echo abs(-5.456) +< 5.456 > + echo abs(-4) +< 4 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->abs() + + +acos({expr}) *acos()* + Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a + |Float| in the range of [0, pi]. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range + [-1, 1]. Otherwise acos() returns "nan". + Examples: > + :echo acos(0) +< 1.570796 > + :echo acos(-0.5) +< 2.094395 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->acos() + + +add({object}, {expr}) *add()* + Append the item {expr} to |List| or |Blob| {object}. Returns + the resulting |List| or |Blob|. Examples: > + :let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item) + :call add(mylist, "woodstock") +< Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single + item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. + When {object} is a |Blob| then {expr} must be a number. + Use |insert()| to add an item at another position. + Returns 1 if {object} is not a |List| or a |Blob|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->add(val1)->add(val2) + + +and({expr}, {expr}) *and()* + Bitwise AND on the two arguments. The arguments are converted + to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. + Also see `or()` and `xor()`. + Example: > + :let flag = and(bits, 0x80) +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + :let flag = bits->and(0x80) + + +append({lnum}, {text}) *append()* + When {text} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a + text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer. + Otherwise append {text} as one text line below line {lnum} in + the current buffer. + Any type of item is accepted and converted to a String. + {lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. + Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory), + 0 for success. When {text} is an empty list zero is returned, + no matter the value of {lnum}. + In |Vim9| script an invalid argument or negative number + results in an error. Example: > + :let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END") + :let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"]) + +< Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is + passed as the second argument: > + mylist->append(lnum) + + +appendbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text}) *appendbufline()* + Like |append()| but append the text in buffer {buf}. + + This function works only for loaded buffers. First call + |bufload()| if needed. + + For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()|. + + {lnum} is the line number to append below. Note that using + |line()| would use the current buffer, not the one appending + to. Use "$" to append at the end of the buffer. Other string + values are not supported. + + On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned. + In |Vim9| script an error is given for an invalid {lnum}. + + If {buf} is not a valid buffer or {lnum} is not valid, an + error message is given. Example: > + :let failed = appendbufline(13, 0, "# THE START") +< However, when {text} is an empty list then no error is given + for an invalid {lnum}, since {lnum} isn't actually used. + + Can also be used as a |method| after a List, the base is + passed as the second argument: > + mylist->appendbufline(buf, lnum) + + +argc([{winid}]) *argc()* + The result is the number of files in the argument list. See + |arglist|. + If {winid} is not supplied, the argument list of the current + window is used. + If {winid} is -1, the global argument list is used. + Otherwise {winid} specifies the window of which the argument + list is used: either the window number or the window ID. + Returns -1 if the {winid} argument is invalid. + + *argidx()* +argidx() The result is the current index in the argument list. 0 is + the first file. argc() - 1 is the last one. See |arglist|. + + *arglistid()* +arglistid([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) + Return the argument list ID. This is a number which + identifies the argument list being used. Zero is used for the + global argument list. See |arglist|. + Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid. + + Without arguments use the current window. + With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page. + With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab + page. + {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + + *argv()* +argv([{nr} [, {winid}]]) + The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list. See + |arglist|. "argv(0)" is the first one. Example: > + :let i = 0 + :while i < argc() + : let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.') + : exe 'amenu Arg.' .. f .. ' :e ' .. f .. '<CR>' + : let i = i + 1 + :endwhile +< Without the {nr} argument, or when {nr} is -1, a |List| with + the whole |arglist| is returned. + + The {winid} argument specifies the window ID, see |argc()|. + For the Vim command line arguments see |v:argv|. + + Returns an empty string if {nr}th argument is not present in + the argument list. Returns an empty List if the {winid} + argument is invalid. + +asin({expr}) *asin()* + Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float| + in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2]. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range + [-1, 1]. + Returns "nan" if {expr} is outside the range [-1, 1]. Returns + 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo asin(0.8) +< 0.927295 > + :echo asin(-0.5) +< -0.523599 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->asin() + + +assert_ functions are documented here: |assert-functions-details| + + + +atan({expr}) *atan()* + Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in + the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo atan(100) +< 1.560797 > + :echo atan(-4.01) +< -1.326405 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->atan() + + +atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) *atan2()* + Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in + radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi]. + {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr1} or {expr2} is not a |Float| or a + |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo atan2(-1, 1) +< -0.785398 > + :echo atan2(1, -1) +< 2.356194 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->atan2(1) + + +autocmd_add({acmds}) *autocmd_add()* + Adds a List of autocmds and autocmd groups. + + The {acmds} argument is a List where each item is a Dict with + the following optional items: + bufnr buffer number to add a buffer-local autocmd. + If this item is specified, then the "pattern" + item is ignored. + cmd Ex command to execute for this autocmd event + event autocmd event name. Refer to |autocmd-events|. + This can be either a String with a single + event name or a List of event names. + group autocmd group name. Refer to |autocmd-groups|. + If this group doesn't exist then it is + created. If not specified or empty, then the + default group is used. + nested boolean flag, set to v:true to add a nested + autocmd. Refer to |autocmd-nested|. + once boolean flag, set to v:true to add an autocmd + which executes only once. Refer to + |autocmd-once|. + pattern autocmd pattern string. Refer to + |autocmd-patterns|. If "bufnr" item is + present, then this item is ignored. This can + be a String with a single pattern or a List of + patterns. + replace boolean flag, set to v:true to remove all the + commands associated with the specified autocmd + event and group and add the {cmd}. This is + useful to avoid adding the same command + multiple times for an autocmd event in a group. + + Returns v:true on success and v:false on failure. + Examples: > + " Create a buffer-local autocmd for buffer 5 + let acmd = {} + let acmd.group = 'MyGroup' + let acmd.event = 'BufEnter' + let acmd.bufnr = 5 + let acmd.cmd = 'call BufEnterFunc()' + call autocmd_add([acmd]) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetAutocmdList()->autocmd_add() +< +autocmd_delete({acmds}) *autocmd_delete()* + Deletes a List of autocmds and autocmd groups. + + The {acmds} argument is a List where each item is a Dict with + the following optional items: + bufnr buffer number to delete a buffer-local autocmd. + If this item is specified, then the "pattern" + item is ignored. + cmd Ex command for this autocmd event + event autocmd event name. Refer to |autocmd-events|. + If '*' then all the autocmd events in this + group are deleted. + group autocmd group name. Refer to |autocmd-groups|. + If not specified or empty, then the default + group is used. + nested set to v:true for a nested autocmd. + Refer to |autocmd-nested|. + once set to v:true for an autocmd which executes + only once. Refer to |autocmd-once|. + pattern autocmd pattern string. Refer to + |autocmd-patterns|. If "bufnr" item is + present, then this item is ignored. + + If only {group} is specified in a {acmds} entry and {event}, + {pattern} and {cmd} are not specified, then that autocmd group + is deleted. + + Returns |v:true| on success and |v:false| on failure. + Examples: > + " :autocmd! BufLeave *.vim + let acmd = #{event: 'BufLeave', pattern: '*.vim'} + call autocmd_delete([acmd]}) + " :autocmd! MyGroup1 BufLeave + let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup1', event: 'BufLeave'} + call autocmd_delete([acmd]) + " :autocmd! MyGroup2 BufEnter *.c + let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup2', event: 'BufEnter', + \ pattern: '*.c'} + " :autocmd! MyGroup2 * *.c + let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup2', event: '*', + \ pattern: '*.c'} + call autocmd_delete([acmd]) + " :autocmd! MyGroup3 + let acmd = #{group: 'MyGroup3'} + call autocmd_delete([acmd]) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetAutocmdList()->autocmd_delete() + +autocmd_get([{opts}]) *autocmd_get()* + Returns a |List| of autocmds. If {opts} is not supplied, then + returns the autocmds for all the events in all the groups. + + The optional {opts} Dict argument supports the following + items: + group Autocmd group name. If specified, returns only + the autocmds defined in this group. If the + specified group doesn't exist, results in an + error message. If set to an empty string, + then the default autocmd group is used. + event Autocmd event name. If specified, returns only + the autocmds defined for this event. If set + to "*", then returns autocmds for all the + events. If the specified event doesn't exist, + results in an error message. + pattern Autocmd pattern. If specified, returns only + the autocmds defined for this pattern. + A combination of the above three times can be supplied in + {opts}. + + Each Dict in the returned List contains the following items: + bufnr For buffer-local autocmds, buffer number where + the autocmd is defined. + cmd Command executed for this autocmd. + event Autocmd event name. + group Autocmd group name. + nested Boolean flag, set to v:true for a nested + autocmd. See |autocmd-nested|. + once Boolean flag, set to v:true, if the autocmd + will be executed only once. See |autocmd-once|. + pattern Autocmd pattern. For a buffer-local + autocmd, this will be of the form "<buffer=n>". + If there are multiple commands for an autocmd event in a + group, then separate items are returned for each command. + + Returns an empty List if an autocmd with the specified group + or event or pattern is not found. + + Examples: > + " :autocmd MyGroup + echo autocmd_get(#{group: 'Mygroup'}) + " :autocmd G BufUnload + echo autocmd_get(#{group: 'G', event: 'BufUnload'}) + " :autocmd G * *.ts + let acmd = #{group: 'G', event: '*', pattern: '*.ts'} + echo autocmd_get(acmd) + " :autocmd Syntax + echo autocmd_get(#{event: 'Syntax'}) + " :autocmd G BufEnter *.ts + let acmd = #{group: 'G', event: 'BufEnter', + \ pattern: '*.ts'} + echo autocmd_get(acmd) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Getopts()->autocmd_get() +< +balloon_gettext() *balloon_gettext()* + Return the current text in the balloon. Only for the string, + not used for the List. Returns an empty string if balloon + is not present. + +balloon_show({expr}) *balloon_show()* + Show {expr} inside the balloon. For the GUI {expr} is used as + a string. For a terminal {expr} can be a list, which contains + the lines of the balloon. If {expr} is not a list it will be + split with |balloon_split()|. + If {expr} is an empty string any existing balloon is removed. + + Example: > + func GetBalloonContent() + " ... initiate getting the content + return '' + endfunc + set balloonexpr=GetBalloonContent() + + func BalloonCallback(result) + call balloon_show(a:result) + endfunc +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->balloon_show() +< + The intended use is that fetching the content of the balloon + is initiated from 'balloonexpr'. It will invoke an + asynchronous method, in which a callback invokes + balloon_show(). The 'balloonexpr' itself can return an + empty string or a placeholder, e.g. "loading...". + + When showing a balloon is not possible then nothing happens, + no error message is given. + {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| or + |+balloon_eval_term| feature} + +balloon_split({msg}) *balloon_split()* + Split String {msg} into lines to be displayed in a balloon. + The splits are made for the current window size and optimize + to show debugger output. + Returns a |List| with the split lines. Returns an empty List + on error. + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->balloon_split()->balloon_show() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval_term| + feature} + +blob2list({blob}) *blob2list()* + Return a List containing the number value of each byte in Blob + {blob}. Examples: > + blob2list(0z0102.0304) returns [1, 2, 3, 4] + blob2list(0z) returns [] +< Returns an empty List on error. |list2blob()| does the + opposite. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBlob()->blob2list() +< + *browse()* +browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) + Put up a file requester. This only works when "has("browse")" + returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions). + The input fields are: + {save} when |TRUE|, select file to write + {title} title for the requester + {initdir} directory to start browsing in + {default} default file name + An empty string is returned when the "Cancel" button is hit, + something went wrong, or browsing is not possible. + + *browsedir()* +browsedir({title}, {initdir}) + Put up a directory requester. This only works when + "has("browse")" returns |TRUE| (only in some GUI versions). + On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file + browser is used. In that case: select a file in the directory + to be used. + The input fields are: + {title} title for the requester + {initdir} directory to start browsing in + When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or + browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned. + +bufadd({name}) *bufadd()* + Add a buffer to the buffer list with name {name} (must be a + String). + If a buffer for file {name} already exists, return that buffer + number. Otherwise return the buffer number of the newly + created buffer. When {name} is an empty string then a new + buffer is always created. + The buffer will not have 'buflisted' set and not be loaded + yet. To add some text to the buffer use this: > + let bufnr = bufadd('someName') + call bufload(bufnr) + call setbufline(bufnr, 1, ['some', 'text']) +< Returns 0 on error. + Can also be used as a |method|: > + let bufnr = 'somename'->bufadd() + +bufexists({buf}) *bufexists()* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called + {buf} exists. + If the {buf} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used. + Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window. + + If the {buf} argument is a string it must match a buffer name + exactly. The name can be: + - Relative to the current directory. + - A full path. + - The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile". + - A URL name. + Unlisted buffers will be found. + Note that help files are listed by their short name in the + output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their + long name to be able to find them. + bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name + with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|. Esp + for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1" + Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate + file name. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + let exists = 'somename'->bufexists() +< + Obsolete name: buffer_exists(). *buffer_exists()* + +buflisted({buf}) *buflisted()* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called + {buf} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set). + The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + let listed = 'somename'->buflisted() + +bufload({buf}) *bufload()* + Ensure the buffer {buf} is loaded. When the buffer name + refers to an existing file then the file is read. Otherwise + the buffer will be empty. If the buffer was already loaded + then there is no change. If the buffer is not related to a + file the no file is read (e.g., when 'buftype' is "nofile"). + If there is an existing swap file for the file of the buffer, + there will be no dialog, the buffer will be loaded anyway. + The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + eval 'somename'->bufload() + +bufloaded({buf}) *bufloaded()* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if a buffer called + {buf} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden). + The {buf} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + let loaded = 'somename'->bufloaded() + +bufname([{buf}]) *bufname()* + The result is the name of a buffer. Mostly as it is displayed + by the `:ls` command, but not using special names such as + "[No Name]". + If {buf} is omitted the current buffer is used. + If {buf} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given. + Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window. + If {buf} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match + with the buffer names. This is always done like 'magic' is + set and 'cpoptions' is empty. When there is more than one + match an empty string is returned. + "" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the + alternate buffer. + A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end + or middle of the buffer name is accepted. If you only want a + full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the + pattern. + Listed buffers are found first. If there is a single match + with a listed buffer, that one is returned. Next unlisted + buffers are searched for. + If the {buf} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer + number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: > + :echo bufname("3" + 0) +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + echo bufnr->bufname() + +< If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty + string is returned. > + bufname("#") alternate buffer name + bufname(3) name of buffer 3 + bufname("%") name of current buffer + bufname("file2") name of buffer where "file2" matches. +< *buffer_name()* + Obsolete name: buffer_name(). + + *bufnr()* +bufnr([{buf} [, {create}]]) + The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by + the `:ls` command. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| + above. + + If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Or, if the + {create} argument is present and TRUE, a new, unlisted, + buffer is created and its number is returned. Example: > + let newbuf = bufnr('Scratch001', 1) +< Using an empty name uses the current buffer. To create a new + buffer with an empty name use |bufadd()|. + + bufnr("$") is the last buffer: > + :let last_buffer = bufnr("$") +< The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number + of existing buffers. Note that not all buffers with a smaller + number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed + them. Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + echo bufref->bufnr() +< + Obsolete name: buffer_number(). *buffer_number()* + *last_buffer_nr()* + Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr(). + +bufwinid({buf}) *bufwinid()* + The result is a Number, which is the |window-ID| of the first + window associated with buffer {buf}. For the use of {buf}, + see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or + there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: > + + echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " .. (bufwinid(1)) +< + Only deals with the current tab page. See |win_findbuf()| for + finding more. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + FindBuffer()->bufwinid() + +bufwinnr({buf}) *bufwinnr()* + Like |bufwinid()| but return the window number instead of the + |window-ID|. + If buffer {buf} doesn't exist or there is no such window, -1 + is returned. Example: > + + echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " .. (bufwinnr(1)) + +< The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" + |:wincmd|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + FindBuffer()->bufwinnr() + +byte2line({byte}) *byte2line()* + Return the line number that contains the character at byte + count {byte} in the current buffer. This includes the + end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option + for the current buffer. The first character has byte count + one. + Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|. + + Returns -1 if the {byte} value is invalid. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetOffset()->byte2line() + +< {not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset| + feature} + +byteidx({expr}, {nr}) *byteidx()* + Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the String + {expr}. Use zero for the first character, it then returns + zero. + If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is + equal to {nr}. + Composing characters are not counted separately, their byte + length is added to the preceding base character. See + |byteidxcomp()| below for counting composing characters + separately. + Example : > + echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3)) +< will display the fourth character. Another way to do the + same: > + let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3)) + echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1)) +< Also see |strgetchar()| and |strcharpart()|. + + If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned. + If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string + in bytes is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->byteidx(idx) + +byteidxcomp({expr}, {nr}) *byteidxcomp()* + Like byteidx(), except that a composing character is counted + as a separate character. Example: > + let s = 'e' .. nr2char(0x301) + echo byteidx(s, 1) + echo byteidxcomp(s, 1) + echo byteidxcomp(s, 2) +< The first and third echo result in 3 ('e' plus composing + character is 3 bytes), the second echo results in 1 ('e' is + one byte). + Only works differently from byteidx() when 'encoding' is set + to a Unicode encoding. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->byteidxcomp(idx) + +call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) *call()* *E699* + Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as + arguments. + {func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function. + a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line. + Returns the return value of the called function. + {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be + used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFunc()->call([arg, arg], dict) + +ceil({expr}) *ceil()* + Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to + {expr} as a |Float| (round up). + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + echo ceil(1.456) +< 2.0 > + echo ceil(-5.456) +< -5.0 > + echo ceil(4.0) +< 4.0 + + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->ceil() + + +ch_ functions are documented here: |channel-functions-details| + + +changenr() *changenr()* + Return the number of the most recent change. This is the same + number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used + with the |:undo| command. + When a change was made it is the number of that change. After + redo it is the number of the redone change. After undo it is + one less than the number of the undone change. + Returns 0 if the undo list is empty. + +char2nr({string} [, {utf8}]) *char2nr()* + Return Number value of the first char in {string}. + Examples: > + char2nr(" ") returns 32 + char2nr("ABC") returns 65 +< When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. + Example for "utf-8": > + char2nr("á") returns 225 + char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195 +< When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat as UTF-8 characters. + A combining character is a separate character. + |nr2char()| does the opposite. + To turn a string into a list of character numbers: > + let str = "ABC" + let list = map(split(str, '\zs'), {_, val -> char2nr(val)}) +< Result: [65, 66, 67] + + Returns 0 if {string} is not a |String|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetChar()->char2nr() + +charclass({string}) *charclass()* + Return the character class of the first character in {string}. + The character class is one of: + 0 blank + 1 punctuation + 2 word character + 3 emoji + other specific Unicode class + The class is used in patterns and word motions. + Returns 0 if {string} is not a |String|. + + +charcol({expr} [, {winid}]) *charcol()* + Same as |col()| but returns the character index of the column + position given with {expr} instead of the byte position. + + Example: + With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": > + charcol('.') returns 3 + col('.') returns 7 + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPos()->col() +< + *charidx()* +charidx({string}, {idx} [, {countcc}]) + Return the character index of the byte at {idx} in {string}. + The index of the first character is zero. + If there are no multibyte characters the returned value is + equal to {idx}. + When {countcc} is omitted or |FALSE|, then composing characters + are not counted separately, their byte length is + added to the preceding base character. + When {countcc} is |TRUE|, then composing characters are + counted as separate characters. + Returns -1 if the arguments are invalid or if {idx} is greater + than the index of the last byte in {string}. An error is + given if the first argument is not a string, the second + argument is not a number or when the third argument is present + and is not zero or one. + See |byteidx()| and |byteidxcomp()| for getting the byte index + from the character index. + Examples: > + echo charidx('áb́ć', 3) returns 1 + echo charidx('áb́ć', 6, 1) returns 4 + echo charidx('áb́ć', 16) returns -1 +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->charidx(idx) + +chdir({dir}) *chdir()* + Change the current working directory to {dir}. The scope of + the directory change depends on the directory of the current + window: + - If the current window has a window-local directory + (|:lcd|), then changes the window local directory. + - Otherwise, if the current tabpage has a local + directory (|:tcd|) then changes the tabpage local + directory. + - Otherwise, changes the global directory. + {dir} must be a String. + If successful, returns the previous working directory. Pass + this to another chdir() to restore the directory. + On failure, returns an empty string. + + Example: > + let save_dir = chdir(newdir) + if save_dir != "" + " ... do some work + call chdir(save_dir) + endif + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetDir()->chdir() +< +cindent({lnum}) *cindent()* + Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C + indenting rules, as with 'cindent'. + The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is + relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. + When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. + See |C-indenting|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->cindent() + +clearmatches([{win}]) *clearmatches()* + Clears all matches previously defined for the current window + by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. + If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or + window ID instead of the current window. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWin()->clearmatches() +< +col({expr} [, {winid}) *col()* + The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column + position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are: + . the cursor position + $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the + number of bytes in the cursor line plus one) + 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is + returned) + v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the + cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode + returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in + that it's updated right away. + Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line + and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get + the last column of a specific line. When "lnum" or "col" is + out of range then col() returns zero. + With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for + that window instead of the current window. + To get the line number use |line()|. To get both use + |getpos()|. + For the screen column position use |virtcol()|. For the + character position use |charcol()|. + Note that only marks in the current file can be used. + Examples: > + col(".") column of cursor + col("$") length of cursor line plus one + col("'t") column of mark t + col("'" .. markname) column of mark markname +< The first column is 1. Returns 0 if {expr} is invalid or when + the window with ID {winid} is not found. + For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another + buffer. + For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the + column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the + line. Also, when using a <Cmd> mapping the cursor isn't + moved, this can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: > + :imap <F2> <Cmd>echowin col(".")<CR> + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPos()->col() +< + +complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785* + Set the matches for Insert mode completion. + Can only be used in Insert mode. You need to use a mapping + with CTRL-R = (see |i_CTRL-R|). It does not work after CTRL-O + or with an expression mapping. + {startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed + text start. The text up to the cursor is the original text + that will be replaced by the matches. Use col('.') for an + empty string. "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a + match. + {matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match. + See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible. + "longest" in 'completeopt' is ignored. + Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid + inserting anything that would cause completion to stop. + The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with + Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if + specified, see |ins-completion-menu|. + Example: > + inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR> + + func! ListMonths() + call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March', + \ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September', + \ 'October', 'November', 'December']) + return '' + endfunc +< This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works. Note that + an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetMatches()->complete(col('.')) + +complete_add({expr}) *complete_add()* + Add {expr} to the list of matches. Only to be used by the + function specified with the 'completefunc' option. + Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory), + 1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in + the list. + See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}. It is + the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMoreMatches()->complete_add() + +complete_check() *complete_check()* + Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches. + This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time. + Returns |TRUE| when searching for matches is to be aborted, + zero otherwise. + Only to be used by the function specified with the + 'completefunc' option. + + +complete_info([{what}]) *complete_info()* + Returns a |Dictionary| with information about Insert mode + completion. See |ins-completion|. + The items are: + mode Current completion mode name string. + See |complete_info_mode| for the values. + pum_visible |TRUE| if popup menu is visible. + See |pumvisible()|. + items List of completion matches. Each item is a + dictionary containing the entries "word", + "abbr", "menu", "kind", "info" and "user_data". + See |complete-items|. + selected Selected item index. First index is zero. + Index is -1 if no item is selected (showing + typed text only, or the last completion after + no item is selected when using the <Up> or + <Down> keys) + inserted Inserted string. [NOT IMPLEMENTED YET] + + *complete_info_mode* + mode values are: + "" Not in completion mode + "keyword" Keyword completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-N| + "ctrl_x" Just pressed CTRL-X |i_CTRL-X| + "scroll" Scrolling with |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-E| or + |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-Y| + "whole_line" Whole lines |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L| + "files" File names |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-F| + "tags" Tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| + "path_defines" Definition completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D| + "path_patterns" Include completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I| + "dictionary" Dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| + "thesaurus" Thesaurus |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T| + "cmdline" Vim Command line |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-V| + "function" User defined completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U| + "omni" Omni completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O| + "spell" Spelling suggestions |i_CTRL-X_s| + "eval" |complete()| completion + "unknown" Other internal modes + + If the optional {what} list argument is supplied, then only + the items listed in {what} are returned. Unsupported items in + {what} are silently ignored. + + To get the position and size of the popup menu, see + |pum_getpos()|. It's also available in |v:event| during the + |CompleteChanged| event. + + Returns an empty |Dictionary| on error. + + Examples: > + " Get all items + call complete_info() + " Get only 'mode' + call complete_info(['mode']) + " Get only 'mode' and 'pum_visible' + call complete_info(['mode', 'pum_visible']) + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetItems()->complete_info() +< + *confirm()* +confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) + confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be + made. It returns the number of the choice. For the first + choice this is 1. + Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog + support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|. + + {msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the + alternatives. When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is + used (and translated). + {msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline. Only on + some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit. + + {choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated + by '\n', e.g. > + confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel") +< The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice. + Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel". The shortcut does + not need to be the first letter: > + confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All") +< For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as + the default shortcut key. Case is ignored. + + The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice + that is made if the user hits <CR>. Use 1 to make the first + choice the default one. Use 0 to not set a default. If + {default} is omitted, 1 is used. + + The optional {type} String argument gives the type of dialog. + This is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and + Win32 GUI. It can be one of these values: "Error", + "Question", "Info", "Warning" or "Generic". Only the first + character is relevant. When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is + used. + + If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C, + or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0. + + An example: > + let choice = confirm("What do you want?", + \ "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2) + if choice == 0 + echo "make up your mind!" + elseif choice == 3 + echo "tasteful" + else + echo "I prefer bananas myself." + endif +< In a GUI dialog, buttons are used. The layout of the buttons + depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. If it is included, + the buttons are always put vertically. Otherwise, confirm() + tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line. If they + don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway. For some systems + the horizontal layout is always used. + + Can also be used as a |method|in: > + BuildMessage()->confirm("&Yes\n&No") +< + *copy()* +copy({expr}) Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't + different from using {expr} directly. + When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created. This means + that the original |List| can be changed without changing the + copy, and vice versa. But the items are identical, thus + changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|. + A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|. + Also see |deepcopy()|. + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->copy() + +cos({expr}) *cos()* + Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo cos(100) +< 0.862319 > + :echo cos(-4.01) +< -0.646043 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->cos() + + +cosh({expr}) *cosh()* + Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range + [1, inf]. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo cosh(0.5) +< 1.127626 > + :echo cosh(-0.5) +< -1.127626 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->cosh() + + +count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) *count()* + Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears + in |String|, |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}. + + If {start} is given then start with the item with this index. + {start} can only be used with a |List|. + + When {ic} is given and it's |TRUE| then case is ignored. + + When {comp} is a string then the number of not overlapping + occurrences of {expr} is returned. Zero is returned when + {expr} is an empty string. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->count(val) +< + *cscope_connection()* +cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) + Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection. If no + parameters are specified, then the function returns: + 0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or + if there are no cscope connections; + 1, if there is at least one cscope connection. + + If parameters are specified, then the value of {num} + determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked: + + {num} Description of existence check + ----- ------------------------------ + 0 Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()"). + 1 Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for + {dbpath}. + 2 Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for + {dbpath}. + 3 Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both + {dbpath} and {prepend}. + 4 Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both + {dbpath} and {prepend}. + + Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive! + + Examples. Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): > + + # pid database name prepend path + 0 27664 cscope.out /usr/local +< + Invocation Return Val ~ + ---------- ---------- > + cscope_connection() 1 + cscope_connection(1, "out") 1 + cscope_connection(2, "out") 0 + cscope_connection(3, "out") 0 + cscope_connection(3, "out", "local") 1 + cscope_connection(4, "out") 0 + cscope_connection(4, "out", "local") 0 + cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local") 1 +< +cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *cursor()* +cursor({list}) + Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the + line {lnum}. The first column is one. + + When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List| + with two, three or four item: + [{lnum}, {col}] + [{lnum}, {col}, {off}] + [{lnum}, {col}, {off}, {curswant}] + This is like the return value of |getpos()| or |getcurpos()|, + but without the first item. + + To position the cursor using the character count, use + |setcursorcharpos()|. + + Does not change the jumplist. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|, except that if {lnum} is + zero, the cursor will stay in the current line. + If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, + the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer. + If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line, + the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the + line. + If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column. + If {curswant} is given it is used to set the preferred column + for vertical movement. Otherwise {col} is used. + + When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in + screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a + position within a <Tab> or after the last character. + Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetCursorPos()->cursor() + +debugbreak({pid}) *debugbreak()* + Specifically used to interrupt a program being debugged. It + will cause process {pid} to get a SIGTRAP. Behavior for other + processes is undefined. See |terminal-debugger|. + {only available on MS-Windows} + + Returns |TRUE| if successfully interrupted the program. + Otherwise returns |FALSE|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPid()->debugbreak() + +deepcopy({expr} [, {noref}]) *deepcopy()* *E698* + Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't + different from using {expr} directly. + When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created. This means + that the original |List| can be changed without changing the + copy, and vice versa. When an item is a |List| or + |Dictionary|, a copy for it is made, recursively. Thus + changing an item in the copy does not change the contents of + the original |List|. + A |Dictionary| is copied in a similar way as a |List|. + + When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or + |Dictionary| is only copied once. All references point to + this single copy. With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a + |List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy. This also means + that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail. + *E724* + Nesting is possible up to 100 levels. When there is an item + that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with + {noref} set to 1 will fail. + Also see |copy()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetObject()->deepcopy() + +delete({fname} [, {flags}]) *delete()* + Without {flags} or with {flags} empty: Deletes the file by the + name {fname}. + + This also works when {fname} is a symbolic link. The symbolic + link itself is deleted, not what it points to. + + When {flags} is "d": Deletes the directory by the name + {fname}. This fails when directory {fname} is not empty. + + When {flags} is "rf": Deletes the directory by the name + {fname} and everything in it, recursively. BE CAREFUL! + Note: on MS-Windows it is not possible to delete a directory + that is being used. + + The result is a Number, which is 0/false if the delete + operation was successful and -1/true when the deletion failed + or partly failed. + + Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|. + To delete a line from the buffer use |:delete| or + |deletebufline()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->delete() + +deletebufline({buf}, {first} [, {last}]) *deletebufline()* + Delete lines {first} to {last} (inclusive) from buffer {buf}. + If {last} is omitted then delete line {first} only. + On success 0 is returned, on failure 1 is returned. + + This function works only for loaded buffers. First call + |bufload()| if needed. + + For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. + + {first} and {last} are used like with |getline()|. Note that + when using |line()| this refers to the current buffer. Use "$" + to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBuffer()->deletebufline(1) +< + *did_filetype()* +did_filetype() Returns |TRUE| when autocommands are being executed and the + FileType event has been triggered at least once. Can be used + to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts + that detect the file type. |FileType| + Returns |FALSE| when `:setf FALLBACK` was used. + When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this + really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the + current buffer. This allows an autocommand that starts + editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax + file. + +diff_filler({lnum}) *diff_filler()* + Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}. + These are the lines that were inserted at this point in + another diff'ed window. These filler lines are shown in the + display but don't exist in the buffer. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current + line, "'m" mark m, etc. + Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->diff_filler() + +diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) *diff_hlID()* + Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column + {col} (byte index). When the current line does not have a + diff change zero is returned. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current + line, "'m" mark m, etc. + {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first + line. + The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain + syntax information about the highlighting. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->diff_hlID(col) +< + +digraph_get({chars}) *digraph_get()* *E1214* + Return the digraph of {chars}. This should be a string with + exactly two characters. If {chars} are not just two + characters, or the digraph of {chars} does not exist, an error + is given and an empty string is returned. + + The character will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding' + when needed. This does require the conversion to be + available, it might fail. + + Also see |digraph_getlist()|. + + Examples: > + " Get a built-in digraph + :echo digraph_get('00') " Returns '∞' + + " Get a user-defined digraph + :call digraph_set('aa', 'あ') + :echo digraph_get('aa') " Returns 'あ' +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetChars()->digraph_get() +< + This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| + feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will + display an error message. + + +digraph_getlist([{listall}]) *digraph_getlist()* + Return a list of digraphs. If the {listall} argument is given + and it is TRUE, return all digraphs, including the default + digraphs. Otherwise, return only user-defined digraphs. + + The characters will be converted from Unicode to 'encoding' + when needed. This does require the conservation to be + available, it might fail. + + Also see |digraph_get()|. + + Examples: > + " Get user-defined digraphs + :echo digraph_getlist() + + " Get all the digraphs, including default digraphs + :echo digraph_getlist(1) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetNumber()->digraph_getlist() +< + This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| + feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will + display an error message. + + +digraph_set({chars}, {digraph}) *digraph_set()* + Add digraph {chars} to the list. {chars} must be a string + with two characters. {digraph} is a string with one UTF-8 + encoded character. *E1215* + Be careful, composing characters are NOT ignored. This + function is similar to |:digraphs| command, but useful to add + digraphs start with a white space. + + The function result is v:true if |digraph| is registered. If + this fails an error message is given and v:false is returned. + + If you want to define multiple digraphs at once, you can use + |digraph_setlist()|. + + Example: > + call digraph_set(' ', 'あ') +< + Can be used as a |method|: > + GetString()->digraph_set('あ') +< + This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| + feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will + display an error message. + + +digraph_setlist({digraphlist}) *digraph_setlist()* + Similar to |digraph_set()| but this function can add multiple + digraphs at once. {digraphlist} is a list composed of lists, + where each list contains two strings with {chars} and + {digraph} as in |digraph_set()|. *E1216* + Example: > + call digraph_setlist([['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']]) +< + It is similar to the following: > + for [chars, digraph] in [['aa', 'あ'], ['ii', 'い']] + call digraph_set(chars, digraph) + endfor +< Except that the function returns after the first error, + following digraphs will not be added. + + Can be used as a |method|: > + GetList()->digraph_setlist() +< + This function works only when compiled with the |+digraphs| + feature. If this feature is disabled, this function will + display an error message. + + +echoraw({string}) *echoraw()* + Output {string} as-is, including unprintable characters. + This can be used to output a terminal code. For example, to + disable modifyOtherKeys: > + call echoraw(&t_TE) +< and to enable it again: > + call echoraw(&t_TI) +< Use with care, you can mess up the terminal this way. + + +empty({expr}) *empty()* + Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise. + - A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any + items. + - A |String| is empty when its length is zero. + - A |Number| and |Float| are empty when their value is zero. + - |v:false|, |v:none| and |v:null| are empty, |v:true| is not. + - A |Job| is empty when it failed to start. + - A |Channel| is empty when it is closed. + - A |Blob| is empty when its length is zero. + + For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the + length with zero. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->empty() + +environ() *environ()* + Return all of environment variables as dictionary. You can + check if an environment variable exists like this: > + :echo has_key(environ(), 'HOME') +< Note that the variable name may be CamelCase; to ignore case + use this: > + :echo index(keys(environ()), 'HOME', 0, 1) != -1 + +escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()* + Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a + backslash. Example: > + :echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \') +< results in: > + c:\\program\ files\\vim +< Also see |shellescape()| and |fnameescape()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->escape(' \') +< + *eval()* +eval({string}) Evaluate {string} and return the result. Especially useful to + turn the result of |string()| back into the original value. + This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings, Blobs and composites + of them. Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing + functions. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + argv->join()->eval() + +eventhandler() *eventhandler()* + Returns 1 when inside an event handler. That is that Vim got + interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character, + e.g., when dropping a file on Vim. This means interactive + commands cannot be used. Otherwise zero is returned. + +executable({expr}) *executable()* + This function checks if an executable with the name {expr} + exists. {expr} must be the name of the program without any + arguments. + executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal + searchpath for programs. *PATHEXT* + On MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can optionally be + included. Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are tried. Thus if + "foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be found. If + $PATHEXT is not set then ".com;.exe;.bat;.cmd" is used. A dot + by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using the name + without an extension. When 'shell' looks like a Unix shell, + then the name is also tried without adding an extension. + On MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and is not a + directory, not if it's really executable. + On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is + normally found. Since this directory is added to $PATH it + should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|. This can be + disabled by setting the $NoDefaultCurrentDirectoryInExePath + environment variable. *NoDefaultCurrentDirectoryInExePath* + The result is a Number: + 1 exists + 0 does not exist + -1 not implemented on this system + |exepath()| can be used to get the full path of an executable. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetCommand()->executable() + +execute({command} [, {silent}]) *execute()* + Execute an Ex command or commands and return the output as a + string. + {command} can be a string or a List. In case of a List the + lines are executed one by one. + This is equivalent to: > + redir => var + {command} + redir END +< + The optional {silent} argument can have these values: + "" no `:silent` used + "silent" `:silent` used + "silent!" `:silent!` used + The default is "silent". Note that with "silent!", unlike + `:redir`, error messages are dropped. When using an external + command the screen may be messed up, use `system()` instead. + *E930* + It is not possible to use `:redir` anywhere in {command}. + + To get a list of lines use |split()| on the result: > + execute('args')->split("\n") + +< To execute a command in another window than the current one + use `win_execute()`. + + When used recursively the output of the recursive call is not + included in the output of the higher level call. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetCommand()->execute() + +exepath({expr}) *exepath()* + If {expr} is an executable and is either an absolute path, a + relative path or found in $PATH, return the full path. + Note that the current directory is used when {expr} starts + with "./", which may be a problem for Vim: > + echo exepath(v:progpath) +< If {expr} cannot be found in $PATH or is not executable then + an empty string is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetCommand()->exepath() +< + *exists()* +exists({expr}) The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| if {expr} is defined, + zero otherwise. + + Note: In a compiled |:def| function the evaluation is done at + runtime. Use `exists_compiled()` to evaluate the expression + at compile time. + + For checking for a supported feature use |has()|. + For checking if a file exists use |filereadable()|. + + The {expr} argument is a string, which contains one of these: + varname internal variable (see + dict.key |internal-variables|). Also works + list[i] for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary| + import.Func entries, |List| items, imported + items, etc. + Does not work for local variables in a + compiled `:def` function. + Also works for a function in |Vim9| + script, since it can be used as a + function reference. + Beware that evaluating an index may + cause an error message for an invalid + expression. E.g.: > + :let l = [1, 2, 3] + :echo exists("l[5]") +< 0 > + :echo exists("l[xx]") +< E121: Undefined variable: xx + 0 + &option-name Vim option (only checks if it exists, + not if it really works) + +option-name Vim option that works. + $ENVNAME environment variable (could also be + done by comparing with an empty + string) + *funcname built-in function (see |functions|) + or user defined function (see + |user-functions|) that is implemented. + Also works for a variable that is a + Funcref. + ?funcname built-in function that could be + implemented; to be used to check if + "funcname" is valid + :cmdname Ex command: built-in command, user + command or command modifier |:command|. + Returns: + 1 for match with start of a command + 2 full match with a command + 3 matches several user commands + To check for a supported command + always check the return value to be 2. + :2match The |:2match| command. + :3match The |:3match| command (but you + probably should not use it, it is + reserved for internal usage) + #event autocommand defined for this event + #event#pattern autocommand defined for this event and + pattern (the pattern is taken + literally and compared to the + autocommand patterns character by + character) + #group autocommand group exists + #group#event autocommand defined for this group and + event. + #group#event#pattern + autocommand defined for this group, + event and pattern. + ##event autocommand for this event is + supported. + + Examples: > + exists("&shortname") + exists("$HOSTNAME") + exists("*strftime") + exists("*s:MyFunc") " only for legacy script + exists("*MyFunc") + exists("bufcount") + exists(":Make") + exists("#CursorHold") + exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz") + exists("#filetypeindent") + exists("#filetypeindent#FileType") + exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*") + exists("##ColorScheme") +< There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the + name. + There must be no extra characters after the name, although in + a few cases this is ignored. That may become stricter in the + future, thus don't count on it! + Working example: > + exists(":make") +< NOT working example: > + exists(":make install") + +< Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the + variable itself. For example: > + exists(bufcount) +< This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable, + but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Varname()->exists() +< + +exists_compiled({expr}) *exists_compiled()* + Like `exists()` but evaluated at compile time. This is useful + to skip a block where a function is used that would otherwise + give an error: > + if exists_compiled('*ThatFunction') + ThatFunction('works') + endif +< If `exists()` were used then a compilation error would be + given if ThatFunction() is not defined. + + {expr} must be a literal string. *E1232* + Can only be used in a |:def| function. *E1233* + This does not work to check for arguments or local variables. + + +exp({expr}) *exp()* + Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range + [0, inf]. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo exp(2) +< 7.389056 > + :echo exp(-1) +< 0.367879 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->exp() + + +expand({string} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) *expand()* + Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in + {string}. 'wildignorecase' applies. + + If {list} is given and it is |TRUE|, a List will be returned. + Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several + matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. [Note: in + version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a + file name contains a space] + + If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. A name + for a non-existing file is not included, unless {string} does + not start with '%', '#' or '<', see below. + + When {string} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is + done like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their + associated modifiers. Here is a short overview: + + % current file name + # alternate file name + #n alternate file name n + <cfile> file name under the cursor + <afile> autocmd file name + <abuf> autocmd buffer number (as a String!) + <amatch> autocmd matched name + <cexpr> C expression under the cursor + <sfile> sourced script file or function name + <slnum> sourced script line number or function + line number + <sflnum> script file line number, also when in + a function + <SID> "<SNR>123_" where "123" is the + current script ID |<SID>| + <script> sourced script file, or script file + where the current function was defined + <stack> call stack + <cword> word under the cursor + <cWORD> WORD under the cursor + <client> the {clientid} of the last received + message |server2client()| + Modifiers: + :p expand to full path + :h head (last path component removed) + :t tail (last path component only) + :r root (one extension removed) + :e extension only + + Example: > + :let &tags = expand("%:p:h") .. "/tags" +< Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or + '<', any following text is ignored. This does NOT work: > + :let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak") +< Use this: > + :let doeswork = expand("%:h") .. ".bak" +< Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the + referenced file name without further expansion. If "<cfile>" + is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the + "~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: > + :echo expand(expand("<cfile>")) +< + There cannot be white space between the variables and the + following modifier. The |fnamemodify()| function can be used + to modify normal file names. + + When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name + is not defined, an empty string is used. Using "%:p" in a + buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a + '/' added. + When 'verbose' is set then expanding '%', '#' and <> items + will result in an error message if the argument cannot be + expanded. + + When {string} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is + expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line. + 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional + {nosuf} argument is given and it is |TRUE|. + Names for non-existing files are included. The "**" item can + be used to search in a directory tree. For example, to find + all "README" files in the current directory and below: > + :echo expand("**/README") +< + expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment + variables that are only known in a shell. But this can be + slow, because a shell may be used to do the expansion. See + |expr-env-expand|. + The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file + names. When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is + left unchanged. Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in + "$FOOBAR". + + See |glob()| for finding existing files. See |system()| for + getting the raw output of an external command. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Getpattern()->expand() + +expandcmd({string} [, {options}]) *expandcmd()* + Expand special items in String {string} like what is done for + an Ex command such as `:edit`. This expands special keywords, + like with |expand()|, and environment variables, anywhere in + {string}. "~user" and "~/path" are only expanded at the + start. + + The following items are supported in the {options} Dict + argument: + errmsg If set to TRUE, error messages are displayed + if an error is encountered during expansion. + By default, error messages are not displayed. + + Returns the expanded string. If an error is encountered + during expansion, the unmodified {string} is returned. + + Example: > + :echo expandcmd('make %<.o') + make /path/runtime/doc/builtin.o + :echo expandcmd('make %<.o', {'errmsg': v:true}) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetCommand()->expandcmd() +< +extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extend()* + {expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both + |Dictionaries|. + + If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}. + If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before the + item with index {expr3} in {expr1}. When {expr3} is zero + insert before the first item. When {expr3} is equal to + len({expr1}) then {expr2} is appended. + Examples: > + :echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5])) + :call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1) +< When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of + items copied is equal to the original length of the List. + E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item + (where N is the original length of the List). + Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list. To concatenate + two lists into a new list use the + operator: > + :let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5] +< + If they are |Dictionaries|: + Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}. + If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is + used to decide what to do: + {expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1} + {expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2} + {expr3} = "error": give an error message *E737* + When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed. + + {expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty. If necessary + make a copy of {expr1} first. + {expr2} remains unchanged. + When {expr1} is locked and {expr2} is not empty the operation + fails. + Returns {expr1}. Returns 0 on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->extend(otherlist) + + +extendnew({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extendnew()* + Like |extend()| but instead of adding items to {expr1} a new + List or Dictionary is created and returned. {expr1} remains + unchanged. + + +feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) *feedkeys()* + Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they + come from a mapping or were typed by the user. + + By default the string is added to the end of the typeahead + buffer, thus if a mapping is still being executed the + characters come after them. Use the 'i' flag to insert before + other characters, they will be executed next, before any + characters from a mapping. + + The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in + {string}. + + To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes + and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example, + feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But + feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters. + A special code that might be useful is <Ignore>, it exits the + wait for a character without doing anything. *<Ignore>* + + {mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags: + 'm' Remap keys. This is default. If {mode} is absent, + keys are remapped. + 'n' Do not remap keys. + 't' Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as + if coming from a mapping. This matters for undo, + opening folds, etc. + 'L' Lowlevel input. Only works for Unix or when using the + GUI. Keys are used as if they were coming from the + terminal. Other flags are not used. *E980* + When a CTRL-C interrupts and 't' is included it sets + the internal "got_int" flag. + 'i' Insert the string instead of appending (see above). + 'x' Execute commands until typeahead is empty. This is + similar to using ":normal!". You can call feedkeys() + several times without 'x' and then one time with 'x' + (possibly with an empty {string}) to execute all the + typeahead. Note that when Vim ends in Insert mode it + will behave as if <Esc> is typed, to avoid getting + stuck, waiting for a character to be typed before the + script continues. + Note that if you manage to call feedkeys() while + executing commands, thus calling it recursively, then + all typeahead will be consumed by the last call. + 'c' Remove any script context when executing, so that + legacy script syntax applies, "s:var" does not work, + etc. Note that if the string being fed sets a script + context this still applies. + '!' When used with 'x' will not end Insert mode. Can be + used in a test when a timer is set to exit Insert mode + a little later. Useful for testing CursorHoldI. + + Return value is always 0. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetInput()->feedkeys() + +filereadable({file}) *filereadable()* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a file with the + name {file} exists, and can be read. If {file} doesn't exist, + or is a directory, the result is |FALSE|. {file} is any + expression, which is used as a String. + If you don't care about the file being readable you can use + |glob()|. + {file} is used as-is, you may want to expand wildcards first: > + echo filereadable('~/.vimrc') + 0 + echo filereadable(expand('~/.vimrc')) + 1 + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->filereadable() +< *file_readable()* + Obsolete name: file_readable(). + + +filewritable({file}) *filewritable()* + The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the + name {file} exists, and can be written. If {file} doesn't + exist, or is not writable, the result is 0. If {file} is a + directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->filewritable() + + +filter({expr1}, {expr2}) *filter()* + {expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|. + For each item in {expr1} evaluate {expr2} and when the result + is zero or false remove the item from the |List| or + |Dictionary|. Similarly for each byte in a |Blob| and each + character in a |String|. + + {expr2} must be a |string| or |Funcref|. + + If {expr2} is a |string|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value + of the current item. For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key + of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of + the current item. For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the + current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the + current character. + Examples: > + call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"') +< Removes the items where "OLD" appears. > + call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8') +< Removes the items with a key below 8. > + call filter(var, 0) +< Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|. + + Note that {expr2} is the result of expression and is then + used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a + |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. + + If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments: + 1. the key or the index of the current item. + 2. the value of the current item. + The function must return |TRUE| if the item should be kept. + Example that keeps the odd items of a list: > + func Odd(idx, val) + return a:idx % 2 == 1 + endfunc + call filter(mylist, function('Odd')) +< It is shorter when using a |lambda|. In |Vim9| syntax: > + call filter(myList, (idx, val) => idx * val <= 42) +< In legacy script syntax: > + call filter(myList, {idx, val -> idx * val <= 42}) +< If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: > + call filter(myList, {idx -> idx % 2 == 1}) +< + In |Vim9| script the result must be true, false, zero or one. + Other values will result in a type error. + + For a |List| and a |Dictionary| the operation is done + in-place. If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy + first: > + :let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"') + +< Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered, + or a new |Blob| or |String|. + When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no + further items in {expr1} are processed. + When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored, + unless it was defined with the "abort" flag. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->filter(expr2) + +finddir({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) *finddir()* + Find directory {name} in {path}. Supports both downwards and + upwards recursive directory searches. See |file-searching| + for the syntax of {path}. + + Returns the path of the first found match. When the found + directory is below the current directory a relative path is + returned. Otherwise a full path is returned. + If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used. + + If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of + {name} in {path} instead of the first one. + When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|. + + Returns an empty string if the directory is not found. + + This is quite similar to the ex-command `:find`. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->finddir() + +findfile({name} [, {path} [, {count}]]) *findfile()* + Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory. + Uses 'suffixesadd'. + Example: > + :echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;") +< Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until + it finds the file "tags.vim". + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->findfile() + +flatten({list} [, {maxdepth}]) *flatten()* + Flatten {list} up to {maxdepth} levels. Without {maxdepth} + the result is a |List| without nesting, as if {maxdepth} is + a very large number. + The {list} is changed in place, use |flattennew()| if you do + not want that. + In Vim9 script flatten() cannot be used, you must always use + |flattennew()|. + *E900* + {maxdepth} means how deep in nested lists changes are made. + {list} is not modified when {maxdepth} is 0. + {maxdepth} must be positive number. + + If there is an error the number zero is returned. + + Example: > + :echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5]) +< [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] > + :echo flatten([1, [2, [3, 4]], 5], 1) +< [1, 2, [3, 4], 5] + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->flatten() +< +flattennew({list} [, {maxdepth}]) *flattennew()* + Like |flatten()| but first make a copy of {list}. + + +float2nr({expr}) *float2nr()* + Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the + decimal point. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the + result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff (or when + 64-bit Number support is enabled, 0x7fffffffffffffff or + -0x7fffffffffffffff). NaN results in -0x80000000 (or when + 64-bit Number support is enabled, -0x8000000000000000). + Examples: > + echo float2nr(3.95) +< 3 > + echo float2nr(-23.45) +< -23 > + echo float2nr(1.0e100) +< 2147483647 (or 9223372036854775807) > + echo float2nr(-1.0e150) +< -2147483647 (or -9223372036854775807) > + echo float2nr(1.0e-100) +< 0 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->float2nr() + + +floor({expr}) *floor()* + Return the largest integral value less than or equal to + {expr} as a |Float| (round down). + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + echo floor(1.856) +< 1.0 > + echo floor(-5.456) +< -6.0 > + echo floor(4.0) +< 4.0 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->floor() + + +fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) *fmod()* + Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the + division is not representable. Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2} + for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the + result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than + the magnitude of {expr2}. If {expr2} is zero, the value + returned is zero. The value returned is a |Float|. + {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr1} or {expr2} is not a |Float| or a + |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo fmod(12.33, 1.22) +< 0.13 > + :echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22) +< -0.13 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->fmod(1.22) + + +fnameescape({string}) *fnameescape()* + Escape {string} for use as file name command argument. All + characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|' + are escaped with a backslash. + For most systems the characters escaped are + " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<". For systems where a backslash + appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'. + A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit| + and |:write|). And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|). + Returns an empty string on error. + Example: > + :let fname = '+some str%nge|name' + :exe "edit " .. fnameescape(fname) +< results in executing: > + edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->fnameescape() + +fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) *fnamemodify()* + Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}. {mods} is a + string of characters like it is used for file names on the + command line. See |filename-modifiers|. + Example: > + :echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h") +< results in: > + /home/user/vim/vim/src +< If {mods} is empty or an unsupported modifier is used then + {fname} is returned. + When {fname} is empty then with {mods} ":h" returns ".", so + that `:cd` can be used with it. This is different from + expand('%:h') without a buffer name, which returns an empty + string. + Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use + |expand()| first then. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->fnamemodify(':p:h') + +foldclosed({lnum}) *foldclosed()* + The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed + fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold. + If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current + line, "'m" mark m, etc. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->foldclosed() + +foldclosedend({lnum}) *foldclosedend()* + The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed + fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold. + If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current + line, "'m" mark m, etc. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->foldclosedend() + +foldlevel({lnum}) *foldlevel()* + The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum} + in the current buffer. For nested folds the deepest level is + returned. If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is + returned. It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed. + When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is + returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the + foldlevel is unknown. As a special case the level of the + previous line is usually available. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current + line, "'m" mark m, etc. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->foldlevel() +< + *foldtext()* +foldtext() Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold. This is + the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should + only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'. It uses the + |v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables. + The returned string looks like this: > + +-- 45 lines: abcdef +< The number of leading dashes depends on the foldlevel. The + "45" is the number of lines in the fold. "abcdef" is the text + in the first non-blank line of the fold. Leading white space, + "//" or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and + 'commentstring' options is removed. + When used to draw the actual foldtext, the rest of the line + will be filled with the fold char from the 'fillchars' + setting. + Returns an empty string when there is no fold. + {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} + +foldtextresult({lnum}) *foldtextresult()* + Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line + {lnum}. Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context. + When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is + returned. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current + line, "'m" mark m, etc. + Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML. + {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} + + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->foldtextresult() +< + *foreground()* +foreground() Move the Vim window to the foreground. Useful when sent from + a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()| + On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always + allow a window to bring itself to the foreground. Use + |remote_foreground()| instead. + {only in the Win32, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the + Win32 console version} + +fullcommand({name} [, {vim9}]) *fullcommand()* + Get the full command name from a short abbreviated command + name; see |20.2| for details on command abbreviations. + + The string argument {name} may start with a `:` and can + include a [range], these are skipped and not returned. + Returns an empty string if a command doesn't exist, if it's + ambiguous (for user-defined commands) or cannot be shortened + this way. |vim9-no-shorten| + + Without the {vim9} argument uses the current script version. + If {vim9} is present and FALSE then legacy script rules are + used. When {vim9} is present and TRUE then Vim9 rules are + used, e.g. "en" is not a short form of "endif". + + For example `fullcommand('s')`, `fullcommand('sub')`, + `fullcommand(':%substitute')` all return "substitute". + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->fullcommand() +< + *funcref()* +funcref({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) + Just like |function()|, but the returned Funcref will lookup + the function by reference, not by name. This matters when the + function {name} is redefined later. + + Unlike |function()|, {name} must be an existing user function. + It only works for an autoloaded function if it has already + been loaded (to avoid mistakenly loading the autoload script + when only intending to use the function name, use |function()| + instead). {name} cannot be a builtin function. + Returns 0 on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFuncname()->funcref([arg]) +< + *function()* *partial* *E700* *E922* *E923* +function({name} [, {arglist}] [, {dict}]) + Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}. + {name} can be the name of a user defined function or an + internal function. + + {name} can also be a Funcref or a partial. When it is a + partial the dict stored in it will be used and the {dict} + argument is not allowed. E.g.: > + let FuncWithArg = function(dict.Func, [arg]) + let Broken = function(dict.Func, [arg], dict) +< + When using the Funcref the function will be found by {name}, + also when it was redefined later. Use |funcref()| to keep the + same function. + + When {arglist} or {dict} is present this creates a partial. + That means the argument list and/or the dictionary is stored in + the Funcref and will be used when the Funcref is called. + + The arguments are passed to the function in front of other + arguments, but after any argument from |method|. Example: > + func Callback(arg1, arg2, name) + ... + let Partial = function('Callback', ['one', 'two']) + ... + call Partial('name') +< Invokes the function as with: > + call Callback('one', 'two', 'name') + +< With a |method|: > + func Callback(one, two, three) + ... + let Partial = function('Callback', ['two']) + ... + eval 'one'->Partial('three') +< Invokes the function as with: > + call Callback('one', 'two', 'three') + +< The function() call can be nested to add more arguments to the + Funcref. The extra arguments are appended to the list of + arguments. Example: > + func Callback(arg1, arg2, name) + "... + let Func = function('Callback', ['one']) + let Func2 = function(Func, ['two']) + "... + call Func2('name') +< Invokes the function as with: > + call Callback('one', 'two', 'name') + +< The Dictionary is only useful when calling a "dict" function. + In that case the {dict} is passed in as "self". Example: > + function Callback() dict + echo "called for " .. self.name + endfunction + "... + let context = {"name": "example"} + let Func = function('Callback', context) + "... + call Func() " will echo: called for example +< The use of function() is not needed when there are no extra + arguments, these two are equivalent, if Callback() is defined + as context.Callback(): > + let Func = function('Callback', context) + let Func = context.Callback + +< The argument list and the Dictionary can be combined: > + function Callback(arg1, count) dict + "... + let context = {"name": "example"} + let Func = function('Callback', ['one'], context) + "... + call Func(500) +< Invokes the function as with: > + call context.Callback('one', 500) +< + Returns 0 on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFuncname()->function([arg]) + + +garbagecollect([{atexit}]) *garbagecollect()* + Cleanup unused |Lists|, |Dictionaries|, |Channels| and |Jobs| + that have circular references. + + There is hardly ever a need to invoke this function, as it is + automatically done when Vim runs out of memory or is waiting + for the user to press a key after 'updatetime'. Items without + circular references are always freed when they become unused. + This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or + |Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs + for a long time. + + When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage + collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't + done before. This is useful when checking for memory leaks. + + The garbage collection is not done immediately but only when + it's safe to perform. This is when waiting for the user to + type a character. To force garbage collection immediately use + |test_garbagecollect_now()|. + +get({list}, {idx} [, {default}]) *get()* + Get item {idx} from |List| {list}. When this item is not + available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is + omitted. + Preferably used as a |method|: > + mylist->get(idx) +get({blob}, {idx} [, {default}]) + Get byte {idx} from |Blob| {blob}. When this byte is not + available return {default}. Return -1 when {default} is + omitted. + Preferably used as a |method|: > + myblob->get(idx) +get({dict}, {key} [, {default}]) + Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}. When this + item is not available return {default}. Return zero when + {default} is omitted. Useful example: > + let val = get(g:, 'var_name', 'default') +< This gets the value of g:var_name if it exists, and uses + 'default' when it does not exist. + Preferably used as a |method|: > + mydict->get(key) +get({func}, {what}) + Get item {what} from Funcref {func}. Possible values for + {what} are: + "name" The function name + "func" The function + "dict" The dictionary + "args" The list with arguments + Returns zero on error. + Preferably used as a |method|: > + myfunc->get(what) +< + *getbufinfo()* +getbufinfo([{buf}]) +getbufinfo([{dict}]) + Get information about buffers as a List of Dictionaries. + + Without an argument information about all the buffers is + returned. + + When the argument is a |Dictionary| only the buffers matching + the specified criteria are returned. The following keys can + be specified in {dict}: + buflisted include only listed buffers. + bufloaded include only loaded buffers. + bufmodified include only modified buffers. + + Otherwise, {buf} specifies a particular buffer to return + information for. For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| + above. If the buffer is found the returned List has one item. + Otherwise the result is an empty list. + + Each returned List item is a dictionary with the following + entries: + bufnr Buffer number. + changed TRUE if the buffer is modified. + changedtick Number of changes made to the buffer. + hidden TRUE if the buffer is hidden. + lastused Timestamp in seconds, like + |localtime()|, when the buffer was + last used. + {only with the |+viminfo| feature} + listed TRUE if the buffer is listed. + lnum Line number used for the buffer when + opened in the current window. + Only valid if the buffer has been + displayed in the window in the past. + If you want the line number of the + last known cursor position in a given + window, use |line()|: > + :echo line('.', {winid}) +< + linecount Number of lines in the buffer (only + valid when loaded) + loaded TRUE if the buffer is loaded. + name Full path to the file in the buffer. + signs List of signs placed in the buffer. + Each list item is a dictionary with + the following fields: + id sign identifier + lnum line number + name sign name + variables A reference to the dictionary with + buffer-local variables. + windows List of |window-ID|s that display this + buffer + popups List of popup |window-ID|s that + display this buffer + + Examples: > + for buf in getbufinfo() + echo buf.name + endfor + for buf in getbufinfo({'buflisted':1}) + if buf.changed + .... + endif + endfor +< + To get buffer-local options use: > + getbufvar({bufnr}, '&option_name') +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBufnr()->getbufinfo() +< + + *getbufline()* +getbufline({buf}, {lnum} [, {end}]) + Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end} + (inclusive) in the buffer {buf}. If {end} is omitted, a + |List| with only the line {lnum} is returned. See + `getbufoneline()` for only getting the line. + + For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. + + For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the + buffer. Otherwise a number must be used. + + When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of + lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned. + + When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, + it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the + buffer. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is + returned. + + This function works only for loaded buffers. For unloaded and + non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned. + + Example: > + :let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$") + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBufnr()->getbufline(lnum) +< + *getbufoneline()* +getbufoneline({buf}, {lnum}) + Just like `getbufline()` but only get one line and return it + as a string. + +getbufvar({buf}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getbufvar()* + The result is the value of option or local buffer variable + {varname} in buffer {buf}. Note that the name without "b:" + must be used. + The {varname} argument is a string. + When {varname} is empty returns a |Dictionary| with all the + buffer-local variables. + When {varname} is equal to "&" returns a |Dictionary| with all + the buffer-local options. + Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" returns the value of + a buffer-local option. + This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it + doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or + window-local option. + For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. + When the buffer or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty + string is returned, there is no error message. + Examples: > + :let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod") + :echo "todo myvar = " .. getbufvar("todo", "myvar") + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBufnr()->getbufvar(varname) +< +getcellwidths() *getcellwidths()* + Returns a |List| of cell widths of character ranges overridden + by |setcellwidths()|. The format is equal to the argument of + |setcellwidths()|. If no character ranges have their cell + widths overridden, an empty List is returned. + + +getchangelist([{buf}]) *getchangelist()* + Returns the |changelist| for the buffer {buf}. For the use + of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. If buffer {buf} doesn't + exist, an empty list is returned. + + The returned list contains two entries: a list with the change + locations and the current position in the list. Each + entry in the change list is a dictionary with the following + entries: + col column number + coladd column offset for 'virtualedit' + lnum line number + If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, then the current + position refers to the position in the list. For other + buffers, it is set to the length of the list. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBufnr()->getchangelist() + +getchar([expr]) *getchar()* + Get a single character from the user or input stream. + If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available. + If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available. + Return zero otherwise. + If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is + not consumed. Return zero if no character available. + If you prefer always getting a string use |getcharstr()|. + + Without [expr] and when [expr] is 0 a whole character or + special key is returned. If it is a single character, the + result is a Number. Use |nr2char()| to convert it to a String. + Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character. + For a special key it's a String with a sequence of bytes + starting with 0x80 (decimal: 128). This is the same value as + the String "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>". The returned value is + also a String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used + that is not included in the character. + + When [expr] is 0 and Esc is typed, there will be a short delay + while Vim waits to see if this is the start of an escape + sequence. + + When [expr] is 1 only the first byte is returned. For a + one-byte character it is the character itself as a number. + Use nr2char() to convert it to a String. + + Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers. + + When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be + returned. The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|, + |v:mouse_lnum|, |v:mouse_winid| and |v:mouse_win|. + |getmousepos()| can also be used. Mouse move events will be + ignored. + This example positions the mouse as it would normally happen: > + let c = getchar() + if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0 + exe v:mouse_win .. "wincmd w" + exe v:mouse_lnum + exe "normal " .. v:mouse_col .. "|" + endif +< + When using bracketed paste only the first character is + returned, the rest of the pasted text is dropped. + |xterm-bracketed-paste|. + + There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the + user that a character has to be typed. The screen is not + redrawn, e.g. when resizing the window. When using a popup + window it should work better with a |popup-filter|. + + There is no mapping for the character. + Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del> + key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character + sequence. Examples: > + getchar() == "\<Del>" + getchar() == "\<S-Left>" +< This example redefines "f" to ignore case: > + :nmap f :call FindChar()<CR> + :function FindChar() + : let c = nr2char(getchar()) + : while col('.') < col('$') - 1 + : normal l + : if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c + : break + : endif + : endwhile + :endfunction +< + You may also receive synthetic characters, such as + |<CursorHold>|. Often you will want to ignore this and get + another character: > + :function GetKey() + : let c = getchar() + : while c == "\<CursorHold>" + : let c = getchar() + : endwhile + : return c + :endfunction + +getcharmod() *getcharmod()* + The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for + the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way. + These values are added together: + 2 shift + 4 control + 8 alt (meta) + 16 meta (when it's different from ALT) + 32 mouse double click + 64 mouse triple click + 96 mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64) + 128 command (Macintosh only) + Only the modifiers that have not been included in the + character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A" + without a modifier. Returns 0 if no modifiers are used. + + *getcharpos()* +getcharpos({expr}) + Get the position for String {expr}. Same as |getpos()| but the + column number in the returned List is a character index + instead of a byte index. + If |getpos()| returns a very large column number, equal to + |v:maxcol|, then getcharpos() will return the character index + of the last character. + + Example: + With the cursor on '세' in line 5 with text "여보세요": > + getcharpos('.') returns [0, 5, 3, 0] + getpos('.') returns [0, 5, 7, 0] +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMark()->getcharpos() + +getcharsearch() *getcharsearch()* + Return the current character search information as a {dict} + with the following entries: + + char character previously used for a character + search (|t|, |f|, |T|, or |F|); empty string + if no character search has been performed + forward direction of character search; 1 for forward, + 0 for backward + until type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T| + character search, 0 for an |f| or |F| + character search + + This can be useful to always have |;| and |,| search + forward/backward regardless of the direction of the previous + character search: > + :nnoremap <expr> ; getcharsearch().forward ? ';' : ',' + :nnoremap <expr> , getcharsearch().forward ? ',' : ';' +< Also see |setcharsearch()|. + + +getcharstr([expr]) *getcharstr()* + Get a single character from the user or input stream as a + string. + If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available. + If [expr] is 0 or false, only get a character when one is + available. Return an empty string otherwise. + If [expr] is 1 or true, only check if a character is + available, it is not consumed. Return an empty string + if no character is available. + Otherwise this works like |getchar()|, except that a number + result is converted to a string. + +getcmdcompltype() *getcmdcompltype()* + Return the type of the current command-line completion. + Only works when the command line is being edited, thus + requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. + See |:command-completion| for the return string. + Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and + |setcmdline()|. + Returns an empty string when completion is not defined. + +getcmdline() *getcmdline()* + Return the current command-line. Only works when the command + line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or + |c_CTRL-R_=|. + Example: > + :cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR> +< Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and + |setcmdline()|. + Returns an empty string when entering a password or using + |inputsecret()|. + +getcmdpos() *getcmdpos()* + Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a + byte count. The first column is 1. + Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of + |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. + Returns 0 otherwise. + Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and + |setcmdline()|. + +getcmdscreenpos() *getcmdscreenpos()* + Return the screen position of the cursor in the command line + as a byte count. The first column is 1. + Instead of |getcmdpos()|, it adds the prompt position. + Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of + |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. + Returns 0 otherwise. + Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()|, |getcmdline()| and + |setcmdline()|. + +getcmdtype() *getcmdtype()* + Return the current command-line type. Possible return values + are: + : normal Ex command + > debug mode command |debug-mode| + / forward search command + ? backward search command + @ |input()| command + - |:insert| or |:append| command + = |i_CTRL-R_=| + Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of + |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. + Returns an empty string otherwise. + Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|. + +getcmdwintype() *getcmdwintype()* + Return the current |command-line-window| type. Possible return + values are the same as |getcmdtype()|. Returns an empty string + when not in the command-line window. + +getcompletion({pat}, {type} [, {filtered}]) *getcompletion()* + Return a list of command-line completion matches. The String + {type} argument specifies what for. The following completion + types are supported: + + arglist file names in argument list + augroup autocmd groups + buffer buffer names + behave |:behave| suboptions + breakpoint |:breakadd| and |:breakdel| suboptions + color color schemes + command Ex command + cmdline |cmdline-completion| result + compiler compilers + cscope |:cscope| suboptions + diff_buffer |:diffget| and |:diffput| completion + dir directory names + environment environment variable names + event autocommand events + expression Vim expression + file file and directory names + file_in_path file and directory names in |'path'| + filetype filetype names |'filetype'| + function function name + help help subjects + highlight highlight groups + history |:history| suboptions + locale locale names (as output of locale -a) + mapclear buffer argument + mapping mapping name + menu menus + messages |:messages| suboptions + option options + packadd optional package |pack-add| names + runtime |:runtime| completion + scriptnames sourced script names |:scriptnames| + shellcmd Shell command + sign |:sign| suboptions + syntax syntax file names |'syntax'| + syntime |:syntime| suboptions + tag tags + tag_listfiles tags, file names + user user names + var user variables + + If {pat} is an empty string, then all the matches are + returned. Otherwise only items matching {pat} are returned. + See |wildcards| for the use of special characters in {pat}. + + If the optional {filtered} flag is set to 1, then 'wildignore' + is applied to filter the results. Otherwise all the matches + are returned. The 'wildignorecase' option always applies. + + If the 'wildoptions' option contains 'fuzzy', then fuzzy + matching is used to get the completion matches. Otherwise + regular expression matching is used. Thus this function + follows the user preference, what happens on the command line. + If you do not want this you can make 'wildoptions' empty + before calling getcompletion() and restore it afterwards. + + If {type} is "cmdline", then the |cmdline-completion| result is + returned. For example, to complete the possible values after + a ":call" command: > + echo getcompletion('call ', 'cmdline') +< + If there are no matches, an empty list is returned. An + invalid value for {type} produces an error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPattern()->getcompletion('color') +< + *getcurpos()* +getcurpos([{winid}]) + Get the position of the cursor. This is like getpos('.'), but + includes an extra "curswant" item in the list: + [0, lnum, col, off, curswant] ~ + The "curswant" number is the preferred column when moving the + cursor vertically. After |$| command it will be a very large + number equal to |v:maxcol|. Also see |getcursorcharpos()| and + |getpos()|. + The first "bufnum" item is always zero. The byte position of + the cursor is returned in 'col'. To get the character + position, use |getcursorcharpos()|. + + The optional {winid} argument can specify the window. It can + be the window number or the |window-ID|. The last known + cursor position is returned, this may be invalid for the + current value of the buffer if it is not the current window. + If {winid} is invalid a list with zeroes is returned. + + This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: > + let save_cursor = getcurpos() + MoveTheCursorAround + call setpos('.', save_cursor) +< Note that this only works within the window. See + |winrestview()| for restoring more state. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->getcurpos() +< + *getcursorcharpos()* +getcursorcharpos([{winid}]) + Same as |getcurpos()| but the column number in the returned + List is a character index instead of a byte index. + + Example: + With the cursor on '보' in line 3 with text "여보세요": > + getcursorcharpos() returns [0, 3, 2, 0, 3] + getcurpos() returns [0, 3, 4, 0, 3] +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->getcursorcharpos() + +< *getcwd()* +getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) + The result is a String, which is the name of the current + working directory. 'autochdir' is ignored. + + With {winnr} return the local current directory of this window + in the current tab page. {winnr} can be the window number or + the |window-ID|. + If {winnr} is -1 return the name of the global working + directory. See also |haslocaldir()|. + + With {winnr} and {tabnr} return the local current directory of + the window in the specified tab page. If {winnr} is -1 return + the working directory of the tabpage. + If {winnr} is zero use the current window, if {tabnr} is zero + use the current tabpage. + Without any arguments, return the actual working directory of + the current window. + Return an empty string if the arguments are invalid. + + Examples: > + " Get the working directory of the current window + :echo getcwd() + :echo getcwd(0) + :echo getcwd(0, 0) + " Get the working directory of window 3 in tabpage 2 + :echo getcwd(3, 2) + " Get the global working directory + :echo getcwd(-1) + " Get the working directory of tabpage 3 + :echo getcwd(-1, 3) + " Get the working directory of current tabpage + :echo getcwd(-1, 0) + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->getcwd() + +getenv({name}) *getenv()* + Return the value of environment variable {name}. The {name} + argument is a string, without a leading '$'. Example: > + myHome = getenv('HOME') + +< When the variable does not exist |v:null| is returned. That + is different from a variable set to an empty string, although + some systems interpret the empty value as the variable being + deleted. See also |expr-env|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetVarname()->getenv() + +getfontname([{name}]) *getfontname()* + Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being + used. Like what is used for the Normal highlight group + |hl-Normal|. + With an argument a check is done whether String {name} is a + valid font name. If not then an empty string is returned. + Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the + GUI does not support obtaining the real name. + Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or + gvimrc file. Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this + function just after the GUI has started. + Note that the GTK GUI accepts any font name, thus checking for + a valid name does not work. + +getfperm({fname}) *getfperm()* + The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute + permissions of the given file {fname}. + If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an + empty string is returned. + The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of + "rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner + of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users. + If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this + is replaced with the string "-". Examples: > + :echo getfperm("/etc/passwd") + :echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc")) +< This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display + the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------". + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFilename()->getfperm() +< + For setting permissions use |setfperm()|. + +getfsize({fname}) *getfsize()* + The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the + given file {fname}. + If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned. + If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned. + If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2 + is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFilename()->getfsize() + +getftime({fname}) *getftime()* + The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of + the given file {fname}. The value is measured as seconds + since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime(). See also + |localtime()| and |strftime()|. + If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFilename()->getftime() + +getftype({fname}) *getftype()* + The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of + file of the given file {fname}. + If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned. + Here is a table over different kinds of files and their + results: + Normal file "file" + Directory "dir" + Symbolic link "link" + Block device "bdev" + Character device "cdev" + Socket "socket" + FIFO "fifo" + All other "other" + Example: > + getftype("/home") +< Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on + systems that support it. On some systems only "dir" and + "file" are returned. On MS-Windows a symbolic link to a + directory returns "dir" instead of "link". + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFilename()->getftype() + +getimstatus() *getimstatus()* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when the IME status is + active and |FALSE| otherwise. + See 'imstatusfunc'. + +getjumplist([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) *getjumplist()* + Returns the |jumplist| for the specified window. + + Without arguments use the current window. + With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page. + {winnr} can also be a |window-ID|. + With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab + page. If {winnr} or {tabnr} is invalid, an empty list is + returned. + + The returned list contains two entries: a list with the jump + locations and the last used jump position number in the list. + Each entry in the jump location list is a dictionary with + the following entries: + bufnr buffer number + col column number + coladd column offset for 'virtualedit' + filename filename if available + lnum line number + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->getjumplist() + +< *getline()* +getline({lnum} [, {end}]) + Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum} + from the current buffer. Example: > + getline(1) +< When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a + digit, |line()| is called to translate the String into a Number. + To get the line under the cursor: > + getline(".") +< When {lnum} is a number smaller than 1 or bigger than the + number of lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned. + + When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is + a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end}, + including line {end}. + {end} is used in the same way as {lnum}. + Non-existing lines are silently omitted. + When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned. + Example: > + :let start = line('.') + :let end = search("^$") - 1 + :let lines = getline(start, end) + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + ComputeLnum()->getline() + +< To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()| and + |getbufoneline()| + +getloclist({nr} [, {what}]) *getloclist()* + Returns a |List| with all the entries in the location list for + window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + When {nr} is zero the current window is used. + + For a location list window, the displayed location list is + returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is + returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|. + + If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then + returns the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. Refer to + |getqflist()| for the supported items in {what}. + + In addition to the items supported by |getqflist()| in {what}, + the following item is supported by |getloclist()|: + + filewinid id of the window used to display files + from the location list. This field is + applicable only when called from a + location list window. See + |location-list-file-window| for more + details. + + Returns a |Dictionary| with default values if there is no + location list for the window {nr}. + Returns an empty Dictionary if window {nr} does not exist. + + Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): > + :echo getloclist(3, {'all': 0}) + :echo getloclist(5, {'filewinid': 0}) + + +getmarklist([{buf}]) *getmarklist()* + Without the {buf} argument returns a |List| with information + about all the global marks. |mark| + + If the optional {buf} argument is specified, returns the + local marks defined in buffer {buf}. For the use of {buf}, + see |bufname()|. If {buf} is invalid, an empty list is + returned. + + Each item in the returned List is a |Dict| with the following: + mark name of the mark prefixed by "'" + pos a |List| with the position of the mark: + [bufnum, lnum, col, off] + Refer to |getpos()| for more information. + file file name + + Refer to |getpos()| for getting information about a specific + mark. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBufnr()->getmarklist() + +getmatches([{win}]) *getmatches()* + Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined for the + current window by |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. + |getmatches()| is useful in combination with |setmatches()|, + as |setmatches()| can restore a list of matches saved by + |getmatches()|. + If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or + window ID instead of the current window. If {win} is invalid, + an empty list is returned. + Example: > + :echo getmatches() +< [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', + 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', + 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > + :let m = getmatches() + :call clearmatches() + :echo getmatches() +< [] > + :call setmatches(m) + :echo getmatches() +< [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', + 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', + 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > + :unlet m +< +getmousepos() *getmousepos()* + Returns a |Dictionary| with the last known position of the + mouse. This can be used in a mapping for a mouse click or in + a filter of a popup window. The items are: + screenrow screen row + screencol screen column + winid Window ID of the click + winrow row inside "winid" + wincol column inside "winid" + line text line inside "winid" + column text column inside "winid" + All numbers are 1-based. + + If not over a window, e.g. when in the command line, then only + "screenrow" and "screencol" are valid, the others are zero. + + When on the status line below a window or the vertical + separator right of a window, the "line" and "column" values + are zero. + + When the position is after the text then "column" is the + length of the text in bytes plus one. + + If the mouse is over a popup window then that window is used. + + When using |getchar()| the Vim variables |v:mouse_lnum|, + |v:mouse_col| and |v:mouse_winid| also provide these values. + +getmouseshape() *getmouseshape()* + Returns the name of the currently showing mouse pointer. + When the |+mouseshape| feature is not supported or the shape + is unknown an empty string is returned. + This function is mainly intended for testing. + + *getpid()* +getpid() Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process. + On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim + exits. + + *getpos()* +getpos({expr}) Get the position for String {expr}. For possible values of + {expr} see |line()|. For getting the cursor position see + |getcurpos()|. + The result is a |List| with four numbers: + [bufnum, lnum, col, off] + "bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it + is the buffer number of the mark. + "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first + column is 1. + The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used. Then + it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the + character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last + character. + Note that for '< and '> Visual mode matters: when it is "V" + (visual line mode) the column of '< is zero and the column of + '> is a large number equal to |v:maxcol|. + The column number in the returned List is the byte position + within the line. To get the character position in the line, + use |getcharpos()|. + A very large column number equal to |v:maxcol| can be returned, + in which case it means "after the end of the line". + If {expr} is invalid, returns a list with all zeros. + This can be used to save and restore the position of a mark: > + let save_a_mark = getpos("'a") + ... + call setpos("'a", save_a_mark) +< Also see |getcharpos()|, |getcurpos()| and |setpos()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMark()->getpos() + +getqflist([{what}]) *getqflist()* + Returns a |List| with all the current quickfix errors. Each + list item is a dictionary with these entries: + bufnr number of buffer that has the file name, use + bufname() to get the name + module module name + lnum line number in the buffer (first line is 1) + end_lnum + end of line number if the item is multiline + col column number (first column is 1) + end_col end of column number if the item has range + vcol |TRUE|: "col" is visual column + |FALSE|: "col" is byte index + nr error number + pattern search pattern used to locate the error + text description of the error + type type of the error, 'E', '1', etc. + valid |TRUE|: recognized error message + + When there is no error list or it's empty, an empty list is + returned. Quickfix list entries with a non-existing buffer + number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero (Note: some + functions accept buffer number zero for the alternate buffer, + you may need to explicitly check for zero). + + Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and + do something with them: > + :vimgrep /theword/jg *.c + :for d in getqflist() + : echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text + :endfor +< + If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then + returns only the items listed in {what} as a dictionary. The + following string items are supported in {what}: + changedtick get the total number of changes made + to the list |quickfix-changedtick| + context get the |quickfix-context| + efm errorformat to use when parsing "lines". If + not present, then the 'errorformat' option + value is used. + id get information for the quickfix list with + |quickfix-ID|; zero means the id for the + current list or the list specified by "nr" + idx get information for the quickfix entry at this + index in the list specified by 'id' or 'nr'. + If set to zero, then uses the current entry. + See |quickfix-index| + items quickfix list entries + lines parse a list of lines using 'efm' and return + the resulting entries. Only a |List| type is + accepted. The current quickfix list is not + modified. See |quickfix-parse|. + nr get information for this quickfix list; zero + means the current quickfix list and "$" means + the last quickfix list + qfbufnr number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix + window. Returns 0 if the quickfix buffer is + not present. See |quickfix-buffer|. + size number of entries in the quickfix list + title get the list title |quickfix-title| + winid get the quickfix |window-ID| + all all of the above quickfix properties + Non-string items in {what} are ignored. To get the value of a + particular item, set it to zero. + If "nr" is not present then the current quickfix list is used. + If both "nr" and a non-zero "id" are specified, then the list + specified by "id" is used. + To get the number of lists in the quickfix stack, set "nr" to + "$" in {what}. The "nr" value in the returned dictionary + contains the quickfix stack size. + When "lines" is specified, all the other items except "efm" + are ignored. The returned dictionary contains the entry + "items" with the list of entries. + + The returned dictionary contains the following entries: + changedtick total number of changes made to the + list |quickfix-changedtick| + context quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context| + If not present, set to "". + id quickfix list ID |quickfix-ID|. If not + present, set to 0. + idx index of the quickfix entry in the list. If not + present, set to 0. + items quickfix list entries. If not present, set to + an empty list. + nr quickfix list number. If not present, set to 0 + qfbufnr number of the buffer displayed in the quickfix + window. If not present, set to 0. + size number of entries in the quickfix list. If not + present, set to 0. + title quickfix list title text. If not present, set + to "". + winid quickfix |window-ID|. If not present, set to 0 + + Examples (See also |getqflist-examples|): > + :echo getqflist({'all': 1}) + :echo getqflist({'nr': 2, 'title': 1}) + :echo getqflist({'lines' : ["F1:10:L10"]}) +< +getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]]) *getreg()* + The result is a String, which is the contents of register + {regname}. Example: > + :let cliptext = getreg('*') +< When register {regname} was not set the result is an empty + string. + The {regname} argument must be a string. *E1162* + + getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression + register. (For use in maps.) + getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can + be restored with |setreg()|. For other registers the extra + argument is ignored, thus you can always give it. + + If {list} is present and |TRUE|, the result type is changed + to |List|. Each list item is one text line. Use it if you care + about zero bytes possibly present inside register: without + third argument both NLs and zero bytes are represented as NLs + (see |NL-used-for-Nul|). + When the register was not set an empty list is returned. + + If {regname} is "", the unnamed register '"' is used. + If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. + In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRegname()->getreg() + +getreginfo([{regname}]) *getreginfo()* + Returns detailed information about register {regname} as a + Dictionary with the following entries: + regcontents List of lines contained in register + {regname}, like + |getreg|({regname}, 1, 1). + regtype the type of register {regname}, as in + |getregtype()|. + isunnamed Boolean flag, v:true if this register + is currently pointed to by the unnamed + register. + points_to for the unnamed register, gives the + single letter name of the register + currently pointed to (see |quotequote|). + For example, after deleting a line + with `dd`, this field will be "1", + which is the register that got the + deleted text. + + The {regname} argument is a string. If {regname} is invalid + or not set, an empty Dictionary will be returned. + If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used. + If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. + The returned Dictionary can be passed to |setreg()|. + In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRegname()->getreginfo() + +getregtype([{regname}]) *getregtype()* + The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}. + The value will be one of: + "v" for |characterwise| text + "V" for |linewise| text + "<CTRL-V>{width}" for |blockwise-visual| text + "" for an empty or unknown register + <CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16. + The {regname} argument is a string. If {regname} is "", the + unnamed register '"' is used. If {regname} is not specified, + |v:register| is used. + In |Vim9-script| {regname} must be one character. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRegname()->getregtype() + +getscriptinfo([{opts}) *getscriptinfo()* + Returns a |List| with information about all the sourced Vim + scripts in the order they were sourced, like what + `:scriptnames` shows. + + The optional Dict argument {opts} supports the following + optional items: + name Script name match pattern. If specified, + and "sid" is not specified, information about + scripts with name that match the pattern + "name" are returned. + sid Script ID |<SID>|. If specified, only + information about the script with ID "sid" is + returned and "name" is ignored. + + Each item in the returned List is a |Dict| with the following + items: + autoload Set to TRUE for a script that was used with + `import autoload` but was not actually sourced + yet (see |import-autoload|). + functions List of script-local function names defined in + the script. Present only when a particular + script is specified using the "sid" item in + {opts}. + name Vim script file name. + sid Script ID |<SID>|. + sourced Script ID of the actually sourced script that + this script name links to, if any, otherwise + zero + variables A dictionary with the script-local variables. + Present only when a particular script is + specified using the "sid" item in {opts}. + Note that this is a copy, the value of + script-local variables cannot be changed using + this dictionary. + version Vimscript version (|scriptversion|) + + Examples: > + :echo getscriptinfo({'name': 'myscript'}) + :echo getscriptinfo({'sid': 15}).variables +< +gettabinfo([{tabnr}]) *gettabinfo()* + If {tabnr} is not specified, then information about all the + tab pages is returned as a |List|. Each List item is a + |Dictionary|. Otherwise, {tabnr} specifies the tab page + number and information about that one is returned. If the tab + page does not exist an empty List is returned. + + Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries: + tabnr tab page number. + variables a reference to the dictionary with + tabpage-local variables + windows List of |window-ID|s in the tab page. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTabnr()->gettabinfo() + +gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabvar()* + Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page + {tabnr}. |t:var| + Tabs are numbered starting with one. + The {varname} argument is a string. When {varname} is empty a + dictionary with all tab-local variables is returned. + Note that the name without "t:" must be used. + When the tab or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty + string is returned, there is no error message. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTabnr()->gettabvar(varname) + +gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabwinvar()* + Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window + {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}. + The {varname} argument is a string. When {varname} is empty a + dictionary with all window-local variables is returned. + When {varname} is equal to "&" get the values of all + window-local options in a |Dictionary|. + Otherwise, when {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a + window-local option. + Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:". + Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage + use |getwinvar()|. + {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. + This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and + window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable + or buffer-local variable. + When the tab, window or variable doesn't exist {def} or an + empty string is returned, there is no error message. + Examples: > + :let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list') + :echo "myvar = " .. gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar') +< + To obtain all window-local variables use: > + gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, '&') + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTabnr()->gettabwinvar(winnr, varname) + +gettagstack([{winnr}]) *gettagstack()* + The result is a Dict, which is the tag stack of window {winnr}. + {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + When {winnr} is not specified, the current window is used. + When window {winnr} doesn't exist, an empty Dict is returned. + + The returned dictionary contains the following entries: + curidx Current index in the stack. When at + top of the stack, set to (length + 1). + Index of bottom of the stack is 1. + items List of items in the stack. Each item + is a dictionary containing the + entries described below. + length Number of entries in the stack. + + Each item in the stack is a dictionary with the following + entries: + bufnr buffer number of the current jump + from cursor position before the tag jump. + See |getpos()| for the format of the + returned list. + matchnr current matching tag number. Used when + multiple matching tags are found for a + name. + tagname name of the tag + + See |tagstack| for more information about the tag stack. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->gettagstack() + + +gettext({text}) *gettext()* + Translate String {text} if possible. + This is mainly for use in the distributed Vim scripts. When + generating message translations the {text} is extracted by + xgettext, the translator can add the translated message in the + .po file and Vim will lookup the translation when gettext() is + called. + For {text} double quoted strings are preferred, because + xgettext does not understand escaping in single quoted + strings. + + +getwininfo([{winid}]) *getwininfo()* + Returns information about windows as a |List| with Dictionaries. + + If {winid} is given Information about the window with that ID + is returned, as a |List| with one item. If the window does not + exist the result is an empty list. + + Without {winid} information about all the windows in all the + tab pages is returned. + + Each List item is a |Dictionary| with the following entries: + botline last complete displayed buffer line + bufnr number of buffer in the window + height window height (excluding winbar) + loclist 1 if showing a location list + {only with the +quickfix feature} + quickfix 1 if quickfix or location list window + {only with the +quickfix feature} + terminal 1 if a terminal window + {only with the +terminal feature} + tabnr tab page number + topline first displayed buffer line + variables a reference to the dictionary with + window-local variables + width window width + winbar 1 if the window has a toolbar, 0 + otherwise + wincol leftmost screen column of the window; + "col" from |win_screenpos()| + textoff number of columns occupied by any + 'foldcolumn', 'signcolumn' and line + number in front of the text + winid |window-ID| + winnr window number + winrow topmost screen line of the window; + "row" from |win_screenpos()| + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->getwininfo() + +getwinpos([{timeout}]) *getwinpos()* + The result is a |List| with two numbers, the result of + |getwinposx()| and |getwinposy()| combined: + [x-pos, y-pos] + {timeout} can be used to specify how long to wait in msec for + a response from the terminal. When omitted 100 msec is used. + Use a longer time for a remote terminal. + When using a value less than 10 and no response is received + within that time, a previously reported position is returned, + if available. This can be used to poll for the position and + do some work in the meantime: > + while 1 + let res = getwinpos(1) + if res[0] >= 0 + break + endif + " Do some work here + endwhile +< + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTimeout()->getwinpos() +< + *getwinposx()* +getwinposx() The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of + the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an + xterm (uses a timeout of 100 msec). + The result will be -1 if the information is not available. + The value can be used with `:winpos`. + + *getwinposy()* +getwinposy() The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of + the top of the GUI Vim window. Also works for an xterm (uses + a timeout of 100 msec). + The result will be -1 if the information is not available. + The value can be used with `:winpos`. + +getwinvar({winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getwinvar()* + Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage. + Examples: > + :let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list') + :echo "myvar = " .. getwinvar(1, 'myvar') + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->getwinvar(varname) +< +glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) *glob()* + Expand the file wildcards in {expr}. See |wildcards| for the + use of special characters. + + Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|, + the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching + one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and + 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. + 'wildignorecase' always applies. + + When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List| + with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, + you also get filenames containing newlines correctly. + Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several + matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. + + If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List. + + You can also use |readdir()| if you need to do complicated + things, such as limiting the number of matches. + + A name for a non-existing file is not included. A symbolic + link is only included if it points to an existing file. + However, when the {alllinks} argument is present and it is + |TRUE| then all symbolic links are included. + + For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from + any external command. Example: > + :let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`") + :let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g") +< The result of the program inside the backticks should be one + item per line. Spaces inside an item are allowed. + + See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables. See + |system()| for getting the raw output of an external command. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->glob() + +glob2regpat({string}) *glob2regpat()* + Convert a file pattern, as used by glob(), into a search + pattern. The result can be used to match with a string that + is a file name. E.g. > + if filename =~ glob2regpat('Make*.mak') +< This is equivalent to: > + if filename =~ '^Make.*\.mak$' +< When {string} is an empty string the result is "^$", match an + empty string. + Note that the result depends on the system. On MS-Windows + a backslash usually means a path separator. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->glob2regpat() +< *globpath()* +globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]]) + Perform glob() for String {expr} on all directories in {path} + and concatenate the results. Example: > + :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim") +< + {path} is a comma-separated list of directory names. Each + directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with + |glob()|. A path separator is inserted when needed. + To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a + backslash. Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a + trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it. + If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no + error message. + + Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is |TRUE|, + the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching + one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and + 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. + + When {list} is present and it is |TRUE| the result is a |List| + with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, you + also get filenames containing newlines correctly. Otherwise + the result is a String and when there are several matches, + they are separated by <NL> characters. Example: > + :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim", 0, 1) +< + {alllinks} is used as with |glob()|. + + The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree. + For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories + in 'runtimepath' and below: > + :echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt") +< Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not + supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetExpr()->globpath(&rtp) +< + *has()* +has({feature} [, {check}]) + When {check} is omitted or is zero: The result is a Number, + which is 1 if the feature {feature} is supported, zero + otherwise. The {feature} argument is a string, case is + ignored. See |feature-list| below. + + When {check} is present and not zero: The result is a Number, + which is 1 if the feature {feature} could ever be supported, + zero otherwise. This is useful to check for a typo in + {feature} and to detect dead code. Keep in mind that an older + Vim version will not know about a feature added later and + features that have been abandoned will not be known by the + current Vim version. + + Also see |exists()| and |exists_compiled()|. + + Note that to skip code that has a syntax error when the + feature is not available, Vim may skip the rest of the line + and miss a following `endif`. Therefore put the `endif` on a + separate line: > + if has('feature') + let x = this->breaks->without->the->feature + endif +< If the `endif` would be moved to the second line as "| endif" it + would not be found. + + +has_key({dict}, {key}) *has_key()* + The result is a Number, which is TRUE if |Dictionary| {dict} + has an entry with key {key}. FALSE otherwise. + The {key} argument is a string. In |Vim9| script a number is + also accepted (and converted to a string) but no other types. + In legacy script the usual automatic conversion to string is + done. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mydict->has_key(key) + +haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]]) *haslocaldir()* + The result is a Number: + 1 when the window has set a local directory via |:lcd| + 2 when the tab-page has set a local directory via |:tcd| + 0 otherwise. + + Without arguments use the current window. + With {winnr} use this window in the current tab page. + With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab + page. + {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + If {winnr} is -1 it is ignored and only the tabpage is used. + Return 0 if the arguments are invalid. + Examples: > + if haslocaldir() == 1 + " window local directory case + elseif haslocaldir() == 2 + " tab-local directory case + else + " global directory case + endif + + " current window + :echo haslocaldir() + :echo haslocaldir(0) + :echo haslocaldir(0, 0) + " window n in current tab page + :echo haslocaldir(n) + :echo haslocaldir(n, 0) + " window n in tab page m + :echo haslocaldir(n, m) + " tab page m + :echo haslocaldir(-1, m) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->haslocaldir() + +hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *hasmapto()* + The result is a Number, which is TRUE if there is a mapping + that contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is + mapped to) and this mapping exists in one of the modes + indicated by {mode}. + The arguments {what} and {mode} are strings. + When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations + instead of mappings. Don't forget to specify Insert and/or + Command-line mode. + Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current + buffer are checked for a match. + If no matching mapping is found FALSE is returned. + The following characters are recognized in {mode}: + n Normal mode + v Visual and Select mode + x Visual mode + s Select mode + o Operator-pending mode + i Insert mode + l Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.) + c Command-line mode + When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used. + + This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists + to a function in a Vim script. Example: > + :if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit') + : map <Leader>d \ABCdoit + :endif +< This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't + already a mapping to "\ABCdoit". + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRHS()->hasmapto() + +histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()* + Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be + one of: *hist-names* + "cmd" or ":" command line history + "search" or "/" search pattern history + "expr" or "=" typed expression history + "input" or "@" input line history + "debug" or ">" debug command history + empty the current or last used history + The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one + character is sufficient. + If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be + shifted to become the newest entry. + The result is a Number: TRUE if the operation was successful, + otherwise FALSE is returned. + + Example: > + :call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d")) + :let date=input("Enter date: ") +< This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetHistory()->histadd('search') + +histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()* + Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names| + for the possible values of {history}. + + If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a + regular expression. All entries matching that expression will + be removed from the history (if there are any). + Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|. + If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as + an index, see |:history-indexing|. The respective entry will + be removed if it exists. + + The result is TRUE for a successful operation, otherwise FALSE + is returned. + + Examples: + Clear expression register history: > + :call histdel("expr") +< + Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: > + :call histdel("/", '^\*') +< + The following three are equivalent: > + :call histdel("search", histnr("search")) + :call histdel("search", -1) + :call histdel("search", '^' .. histget("search", -1) .. '$') +< + To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for + the "n" command and 'hlsearch': > + :call histdel("search", -1) + :let @/ = histget("search", -1) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetHistory()->histdel() + +histget({history} [, {index}]) *histget()* + The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from + {history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of + {history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}. If there is + no such entry, an empty String is returned. When {index} is + omitted, the most recent item from the history is used. + + Examples: + Redo the second last search from history. > + :execute '/' .. histget("search", -2) + +< Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of + the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. > + :command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetHistory()->histget() + +histnr({history}) *histnr()* + The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}. + See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}. + If an error occurred, -1 is returned. + + Example: > + :let inp_index = histnr("expr") + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetHistory()->histnr() +< +hlexists({name}) *hlexists()* + The result is a Number, which is TRUE if a highlight group + called {name} exists. This is when the group has been + defined in some way. Not necessarily when highlighting has + been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax + item. + *highlight_exists()* + Obsolete name: highlight_exists(). + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->hlexists() +< +hlget([{name} [, {resolve}]]) *hlget()* + Returns a List of all the highlight group attributes. If the + optional {name} is specified, then returns a List with only + the attributes of the specified highlight group. Returns an + empty List if the highlight group {name} is not present. + + If the optional {resolve} argument is set to v:true and the + highlight group {name} is linked to another group, then the + link is resolved recursively and the attributes of the + resolved highlight group are returned. + + Each entry in the returned List is a Dictionary with the + following items: + cleared boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight + group attributes are cleared or not yet + specified. See |highlight-clear|. + cterm cterm attributes. See |highlight-cterm|. + ctermbg cterm background color. + See |highlight-ctermbg|. + ctermfg cterm foreground color. + See |highlight-ctermfg|. + ctermul cterm underline color. See |highlight-ctermul|. + default boolean flag, set to v:true if the highlight + group link is a default link. See + |highlight-default|. + font highlight group font. See |highlight-font|. + gui gui attributes. See |highlight-gui|. + guibg gui background color. See |highlight-guibg|. + guifg gui foreground color. See |highlight-guifg|. + guisp gui special color. See |highlight-guisp|. + id highlight group ID. + linksto linked highlight group name. + See |:highlight-link|. + name highlight group name. See |group-name|. + start start terminal keycode. See |highlight-start|. + stop stop terminal keycode. See |highlight-stop|. + term term attributes. See |highlight-term|. + + The 'term', 'cterm' and 'gui' items in the above Dictionary + have a dictionary value with the following optional boolean + items: 'bold', 'standout', 'underline', 'undercurl', 'italic', + 'reverse', 'inverse' and 'strikethrough'. + + Example(s): > + :echo hlget() + :echo hlget('ModeMsg') + :echo hlget('Number', v:true) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->hlget() +< +hlset({list}) *hlset()* + Creates or modifies the attributes of a List of highlight + groups. Each item in {list} is a dictionary containing the + attributes of a highlight group. See |hlget()| for the list of + supported items in this dictionary. + + In addition to the items described in |hlget()|, the following + additional items are supported in the dictionary: + + force boolean flag to force the creation of + a link for an existing highlight group + with attributes. + + The highlight group is identified using the 'name' item and + the 'id' item (if supplied) is ignored. If a highlight group + with a specified name doesn't exist, then it is created. + Otherwise the attributes of an existing highlight group are + modified. + + If an empty dictionary value is used for the 'term' or 'cterm' + or 'gui' entries, then the corresponding attributes are + cleared. If the 'cleared' item is set to v:true, then all the + attributes of the highlight group are cleared. + + The 'linksto' item can be used to link a highlight group to + another highlight group. See |:highlight-link|. + + Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. + + Example(s): > + " add bold attribute to the Visual highlight group + :call hlset([#{name: 'Visual', + \ term: #{reverse: 1 , bold: 1}}]) + :call hlset([#{name: 'Type', guifg: 'DarkGreen'}]) + :let l = hlget() + :call hlset(l) + " clear the Search highlight group + :call hlset([#{name: 'Search', cleared: v:true}]) + " clear the 'term' attributes for a highlight group + :call hlset([#{name: 'Title', term: {}}]) + " create the MyHlg group linking it to DiffAdd + :call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'DiffAdd'}]) + " remove the MyHlg group link + :call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', linksto: 'NONE'}]) + " clear the attributes and a link + :call hlset([#{name: 'MyHlg', cleared: v:true, + \ linksto: 'NONE'}]) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetAttrList()->hlset() +< + *hlID()* +hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group + with name {name}. When the highlight group doesn't exist, + zero is returned. + This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight + group. For example, to get the background color of the + "Comment" group: > + :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg") +< *highlightID()* + Obsolete name: highlightID(). + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->hlID() + +hostname() *hostname()* + The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on + which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than + 256 characters long are truncated. + +iconv({string}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()* + The result is a String, which is the text {string} converted + from encoding {from} to encoding {to}. + When the conversion completely fails an empty string is + returned. When some characters could not be converted they + are replaced with "?". + The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function + can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv". + Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv| + feature. Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back + can be done. + This can be used to display messages with special characters, + no matter what 'encoding' is set to. Write the message in + UTF-8 and use: > + echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc) +< Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion + from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8. You + cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->iconv('latin1', 'utf-8') +< + *indent()* +indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the + current buffer. The indent is counted in spaces, the value + of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in + |getline()|. + When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an + error is given. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->indent() + +index({object}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()* + Find {expr} in {object} and return its index. See + |indexof()| for using a lambda to select the item. + + If {object} is a |List| return the lowest index where the item + has a value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic + conversion, so the String "4" is different from the Number 4. + And the number 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value + of 'ignorecase' is not used here, case matters as indicated by + the {ic} argument. + + If {object} is |Blob| return the lowest index where the byte + value is equal to {expr}. + + If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index + {start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end). + + When {ic} is given and it is |TRUE|, ignore case. Otherwise + case must match. + + -1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {object}. + Example: > + :let idx = index(words, "the") + :if index(numbers, 123) >= 0 + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetObject()->index(what) + +indexof({object}, {expr} [, {opts}]) *indexof()* + Returns the index of an item in {object} where {expr} is + v:true. {object} must be a |List| or a |Blob|. + + If {object} is a |List|, evaluate {expr} for each item in the + List until the expression is v:true and return the index of + this item. + + If {object} is a |Blob| evaluate {expr} for each byte in the + Blob until the expression is v:true and return the index of + this byte. + + {expr} must be a |string| or |Funcref|. + + If {expr} is a |string|: If {object} is a |List|, inside + {expr} |v:key| has the index of the current List item and + |v:val| has the value of the item. If {object} is a |Blob|, + inside {expr} |v:key| has the index of the current byte and + |v:val| has the byte value. + + If {expr} is a |Funcref| it must take two arguments: + 1. the key or the index of the current item. + 2. the value of the current item. + The function must return |TRUE| if the item is found and the + search should stop. + + The optional argument {opts} is a Dict and supports the + following items: + startidx start evaluating {expr} at the item with this + index; may be negative for an item relative to + the end + Returns -1 when {expr} evaluates to v:false for all the items. + Example: > + :let l = [#{n: 10}, #{n: 20}, #{n: 30}] + :echo indexof(l, "v:val.n == 20") + :echo indexof(l, {i, v -> v.n == 30}) + :echo indexof(l, "v:val.n == 20", #{startidx: 1}) + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->indexof(expr) + +input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()* + The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on + the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt + string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used + in the prompt to start a new line. + The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt. + The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same + editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history + for lines typed for input(). + Example: > + :if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer" + : echo "Cheers!" + :endif +< + If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this + is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this. + Example: > + :let color = input("Color? ", "white") + +< The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of + completion supported for the input. Without it completion is + not performed. The supported completion types are the same as + that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the + "-complete=" argument. Refer to |:command-completion| for + more information. Example: > + let fname = input("File: ", "", "file") +< + NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for + the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI). + Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will + consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a + mapping is handled like the characters were typed. + Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()| + after input() to avoid that. Another solution is to avoid + that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using + |:execute| or |:normal|. + + Example with a mapping: > + :nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" .. Foo<CR> + :function GetFoo() + : call inputsave() + : let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ") + : call inputrestore() + :endfunction + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPrompt()->input() + +inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()* + Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs + are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text. + Example: > + :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth()) + :if n != "" + : let &sw = n + :endif +< When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned. When + omitted an empty string is returned. + Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button. Hitting + <Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button. + NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPrompt()->inputdialog() + +inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()* + {textlist} must be a |List| of strings. This |List| is + displayed, one string per line. The user will be prompted to + enter a number, which is returned. + The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the + mouse, if the mouse is enabled in the command line ('mouse' is + "a" or includes "c"). For the first string 0 is returned. + When clicking above the first item a negative number is + returned. When clicking on the prompt one more than the + length of {textlist} is returned. + Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise + it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at + the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item. + Example: > + let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red', + \ '2. green', '3. blue']) + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetChoices()->inputlist() + +inputrestore() *inputrestore()* + Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|. + Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is + called. Calling it more often is harmless though. + Returns TRUE when there is nothing to restore, FALSE otherwise. + +inputsave() *inputsave()* + Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that + a following prompt gets input from the user. Should be + followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt. Can + be used several times, in which case there must be just as + many inputrestore() calls. + Returns TRUE when out of memory, FALSE otherwise. + +inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) *inputsecret()* + This function acts much like the |input()| function with but + two exceptions: + a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of + asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and + b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input + |history| stack. + The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually + typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt. + NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPrompt()->inputsecret() + +insert({object}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()* + When {object} is a |List| or a |Blob| insert {item} at the start + of it. + + If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index + {idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just + like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see + |list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item. + + Returns the resulting |List| or |Blob|. Examples: > + :let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1) + :call insert(mylist, 4, -1) + :call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist)) +< The last example can be done simpler with |add()|. + Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single + item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->insert(item) + +interrupt() *interrupt()* + Interrupt script execution. It works more or less like the + user typing CTRL-C, most commands won't execute and control + returns to the user. This is useful to abort execution + from lower down, e.g. in an autocommand. Example: > + :function s:check_typoname(file) + : if fnamemodify(a:file, ':t') == '[' + : echomsg 'Maybe typo' + : call interrupt() + : endif + :endfunction + :au BufWritePre * call s:check_typoname(expand('<amatch>')) + +invert({expr}) *invert()* + Bitwise invert. The argument is converted to a number. A + List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Example: > + :let bits = invert(bits) +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + :let bits = bits->invert() + +isabsolutepath({path}) *isabsolutepath()* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {path} is an + absolute path. + On Unix, a path is considered absolute when it starts with '/'. + On MS-Windows, it is considered absolute when it starts with an + optional drive prefix and is followed by a '\' or '/'. UNC paths + are always absolute. + Example: > + echo isabsolutepath('/usr/share/') " 1 + echo isabsolutepath('./foobar') " 0 + echo isabsolutepath('C:\Windows') " 1 + echo isabsolutepath('foobar') " 0 + echo isabsolutepath('\\remote\file') " 1 +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->isabsolutepath() + + +isdirectory({directory}) *isdirectory()* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when a directory + with the name {directory} exists. If {directory} doesn't + exist, or isn't a directory, the result is |FALSE|. {directory} + is any expression, which is used as a String. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->isdirectory() + +isinf({expr}) *isinf()* + Return 1 if {expr} is a positive infinity, or -1 a negative + infinity, otherwise 0. > + :echo isinf(1.0 / 0.0) +< 1 > + :echo isinf(-1.0 / 0.0) +< -1 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->isinf() + +islocked({expr}) *islocked()* *E786* + The result is a Number, which is |TRUE| when {expr} is the + name of a locked variable. + The string argument {expr} must be the name of a variable, + |List| item or |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself! + Example: > + :let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3] + :lockvar 1 alist + :echo islocked('alist') " 1 + :echo islocked('alist[1]') " 0 + +< When {expr} is a variable that does not exist -1 is returned. + If {expr} uses a range, list or dict index that is out of + range or does not exist you get an error message. Use + |exists()| to check for existence. + In Vim9 script it does not work for local function variables. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->islocked() + +isnan({expr}) *isnan()* + Return |TRUE| if {expr} is a float with value NaN. > + echo isnan(0.0 / 0.0) +< 1 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->isnan() + +items({dict}) *items()* + Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}. Each + |List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict} + entry and the value of this entry. The |List| is in arbitrary + order. Also see |keys()| and |values()|. + Example: > + for [key, value] in items(mydict) + echo key .. ': ' .. value + endfor + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + mydict->items() + +job_ functions are documented here: |job-functions-details| + + +join({list} [, {sep}]) *join()* + Join the items in {list} together into one String. + When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items. If + {sep} is omitted a single space is used. + Note that {sep} is not added at the end. You might want to + add it there too: > + let lines = join(mylist, "\n") .. "\n" +< String items are used as-is. |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are + converted into a string like with |string()|. + The opposite function is |split()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->join() + +js_decode({string}) *js_decode()* + This is similar to |json_decode()| with these differences: + - Object key names do not have to be in quotes. + - Strings can be in single quotes. + - Empty items in an array (between two commas) are allowed and + result in v:none items. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + ReadObject()->js_decode() + +js_encode({expr}) *js_encode()* + This is similar to |json_encode()| with these differences: + - Object key names are not in quotes. + - v:none items in an array result in an empty item between + commas. + For example, the Vim object: + [1,v:none,{"one":1},v:none] ~ + Will be encoded as: + [1,,{one:1},,] ~ + While json_encode() would produce: + [1,null,{"one":1},null] ~ + This encoding is valid for JavaScript. It is more efficient + than JSON, especially when using an array with optional items. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetObject()->js_encode() + +json_decode({string}) *json_decode()* *E491* + This parses a JSON formatted string and returns the equivalent + in Vim values. See |json_encode()| for the relation between + JSON and Vim values. + The decoding is permissive: + - A trailing comma in an array and object is ignored, e.g. + "[1, 2, ]" is the same as "[1, 2]". + - Integer keys are accepted in objects, e.g. {1:2} is the + same as {"1":2}. + - More floating point numbers are recognized, e.g. "1." for + "1.0", or "001.2" for "1.2". Special floating point values + "Infinity", "-Infinity" and "NaN" (capitalization ignored) + are accepted. + - Leading zeroes in integer numbers are ignored, e.g. "012" + for "12" or "-012" for "-12". + - Capitalization is ignored in literal names null, true or + false, e.g. "NULL" for "null", "True" for "true". + - Control characters U+0000 through U+001F which are not + escaped in strings are accepted, e.g. " " (tab + character in string) for "\t". + - An empty JSON expression or made of only spaces is accepted + and results in v:none. + - Backslash in an invalid 2-character sequence escape is + ignored, e.g. "\a" is decoded as "a". + - A correct surrogate pair in JSON strings should normally be + a 12 character sequence such as "\uD834\uDD1E", but + json_decode() silently accepts truncated surrogate pairs + such as "\uD834" or "\uD834\u" + *E938* + A duplicate key in an object, valid in rfc7159, is not + accepted by json_decode() as the result must be a valid Vim + type, e.g. this fails: {"a":"b", "a":"c"} + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + ReadObject()->json_decode() + +json_encode({expr}) *json_encode()* + Encode {expr} as JSON and return this as a string. + The encoding is specified in: + https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7159.html + Vim values are converted as follows: *E1161* + |Number| decimal number + |Float| floating point number + Float nan "NaN" + Float inf "Infinity" + Float -inf "-Infinity" + |String| in double quotes (possibly null) + |Funcref| not possible, error + |List| as an array (possibly null); when + used recursively: [] + |Dict| as an object (possibly null); when + used recursively: {} + |Blob| as an array of the individual bytes + v:false "false" + v:true "true" + v:none "null" + v:null "null" + Note that NaN and Infinity are passed on as values. This is + missing in the JSON standard, but several implementations do + allow it. If not then you will get an error. + If a string contains an illegal character then the replacement + character 0xfffd is used. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetObject()->json_encode() + +keys({dict}) *keys()* + Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}. The |List| is in + arbitrary order. Also see |items()| and |values()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mydict->keys() + +keytrans({string}) *keytrans()* + Turn the internal byte representation of keys into a form that + can be used for |:map|. E.g. > + :let xx = "\<C-Home>" + :echo keytrans(xx) +< <C-Home> + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + "\<C-Home>"->keytrans() + +< *len()* *E701* +len({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument. + When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is + used, as with |strlen()|. + When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is + returned. + When {expr} is a |Blob| the number of bytes is returned. + When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the + |Dictionary| is returned. + Otherwise an error is given and returns zero. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->len() + +< *libcall()* *E364* *E368* +libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) + Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname} + with single argument {argument}. + This is useful to call functions in a library that you + especially made to be used with Vim. Since only one argument + is possible, calling standard library functions is rather + limited. + The result is the String returned by the function. If the + function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string "" + to Vim. + If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()! + If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an + int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a + null-terminated string. + This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. + + libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to + Vim without having to recompile the program. It is NOT a + means to call system functions! If you try to do so Vim will + very probably crash. + + For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL + and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is + used in Windows System DLLs). The function must take exactly + one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer, + and must return a character pointer or NULL. The character + pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid + after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the + DLL). If it points to allocated memory, that memory will + leak away. Using a static buffer in the function should work, + it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded. + + WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may + crash! This also happens if the function returns a number, + because Vim thinks it's a pointer. + For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL + without the ".DLL" suffix. A full path is only required if + the DLL is not in the usual places. + For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the + object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC'). + {only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| + feature is present} + Examples: > + :echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME") + +< Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + third argument: > + GetValue()->libcall("libc.so", "getenv") +< + *libcallnr()* +libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) + Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an + int instead of a string. + {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| + feature is present} + Examples: > + :echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "") + :call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n") + :call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10) +< + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + third argument: > + GetValue()->libcallnr("libc.so", "printf") +< + +line({expr} [, {winid}]) *line()* + The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file + position given with {expr}. The {expr} argument is a string. + The accepted positions are: *E1209* + . the cursor position + $ the last line in the current buffer + 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is + returned) + w0 first line visible in current window (one if the + display isn't updated, e.g. in silent Ex mode) + w$ last line visible in current window (this is one + less than "w0" if no lines are visible) + v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the + cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode + returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in + that it's updated right away. + Note that a mark in another file can be used. The line number + then applies to another buffer. + To get the column number use |col()|. To get both use + |getpos()|. + With the optional {winid} argument the values are obtained for + that window instead of the current window. + Returns 0 for invalid values of {expr} and {winid}. + Examples: > + line(".") line number of the cursor + line(".", winid) idem, in window "winid" + line("'t") line number of mark t + line("'" .. marker) line number of mark marker +< + To jump to the last known position when opening a file see + |last-position-jump|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetValue()->line() + +line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()* + Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line + {lnum}. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on + the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first + line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored. + This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just + below the last line: > + line2byte(line("$") + 1) +< This is the buffer size plus one. If 'fileencoding' is empty + it is the file size plus one. {lnum} is used like with + |getline()|. When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| + feature has been disabled at compile time, -1 is returned. + Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->line2byte() + +lispindent({lnum}) *lispindent()* + Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp + indenting rules, as with 'lisp'. + The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is + relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. + When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an + error is given. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->lispindent() + +list2blob({list}) *list2blob()* + Return a Blob concatenating all the number values in {list}. + Examples: > + list2blob([1, 2, 3, 4]) returns 0z01020304 + list2blob([]) returns 0z +< Returns an empty Blob on error. If one of the numbers is + negative or more than 255 error *E1239* is given. + + |blob2list()| does the opposite. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetList()->list2blob() + +list2str({list} [, {utf8}]) *list2str()* + Convert each number in {list} to a character string can + concatenate them all. Examples: > + list2str([32]) returns " " + list2str([65, 66, 67]) returns "ABC" +< The same can be done (slowly) with: > + join(map(list, {nr, val -> nr2char(val)}), '') +< |str2list()| does the opposite. + + When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. + When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters. + With UTF-8 composing characters work as expected: > + list2str([97, 769]) returns "á" +< + Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetList()->list2str() + +listener_add({callback} [, {buf}]) *listener_add()* + Add a callback function that will be invoked when changes have + been made to buffer {buf}. + {buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted + values, see |bufname()|. When {buf} is omitted the current + buffer is used. + Returns a unique ID that can be passed to |listener_remove()|. + + The {callback} is invoked with five arguments: + bufnr the buffer that was changed + start first changed line number + end first line number below the change + added number of lines added, negative if lines were + deleted + changes a List of items with details about the changes + + Example: > + func Listener(bufnr, start, end, added, changes) + echo 'lines ' .. a:start .. ' until ' .. a:end .. ' changed' + endfunc + call listener_add('Listener', bufnr) + +< The List cannot be changed. Each item in "changes" is a + dictionary with these entries: + lnum the first line number of the change + end the first line below the change + added number of lines added; negative if lines were + deleted + col first column in "lnum" that was affected by + the change; one if unknown or the whole line + was affected; this is a byte index, first + character has a value of one. + When lines are inserted (not when a line is split, e.g. by + typing CR in Insert mode) the values are: + lnum line above which the new line is added + end equal to "lnum" + added number of lines inserted + col 1 + When lines are deleted the values are: + lnum the first deleted line + end the line below the first deleted line, before + the deletion was done + added negative, number of lines deleted + col 1 + When lines are changed: + lnum the first changed line + end the line below the last changed line + added 0 + col first column with a change or 1 + + The entries are in the order the changes were made, thus the + most recent change is at the end. The line numbers are valid + when the callback is invoked, but later changes may make them + invalid, thus keeping a copy for later might not work. + + The {callback} is invoked just before the screen is updated, + when |listener_flush()| is called or when a change is being + made that changes the line count in a way it causes a line + number in the list of changes to become invalid. + + The {callback} is invoked with the text locked, see + |textlock|. If you do need to make changes to the buffer, use + a timer to do this later |timer_start()|. + + The {callback} is not invoked when the buffer is first loaded. + Use the |BufReadPost| autocmd event to handle the initial text + of a buffer. + The {callback} is also not invoked when the buffer is + unloaded, use the |BufUnload| autocmd event for that. + + Returns zero if {callback} or {buf} is invalid. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetBuffer()->listener_add(callback) + +listener_flush([{buf}]) *listener_flush()* + Invoke listener callbacks for buffer {buf}. If there are no + pending changes then no callbacks are invoked. + + {buf} refers to a buffer name or number. For the accepted + values, see |bufname()|. When {buf} is omitted the current + buffer is used. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBuffer()->listener_flush() + +listener_remove({id}) *listener_remove()* + Remove a listener previously added with listener_add(). + Returns FALSE when {id} could not be found, TRUE when {id} was + removed. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetListenerId()->listener_remove() + +localtime() *localtime()* + Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan + 1970. See also |strftime()|, |strptime()| and |getftime()|. + + +log({expr}) *log()* + Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range + (0, inf]. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo log(10) +< 2.302585 > + :echo log(exp(5)) +< 5.0 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->log() + + +log10({expr}) *log10()* + Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo log10(1000) +< 3.0 > + :echo log10(0.01) +< -2.0 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->log10() + +luaeval({expr} [, {expr}]) *luaeval()* + Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted + to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional + argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}. + Strings are returned as they are. + Boolean objects are converted to numbers. + Numbers are converted to |Float| values. + Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned + as-is. + Other objects are returned as zero without any errors. + See |lua-luaeval| for more details. + Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible + to {expr}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->luaeval() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature} + +map({expr1}, {expr2}) *map()* + {expr1} must be a |List|, |String|, |Blob| or |Dictionary|. + When {expr1} is a |List| or |Dictionary|, replace each + item in {expr1} with the result of evaluating {expr2}. + For a |Blob| each byte is replaced. + For a |String|, each character, including composing + characters, is replaced. + If the item type changes you may want to use |mapnew()| to + create a new List or Dictionary. This is required when using + Vim9 script. + + {expr2} must be a |String| or |Funcref|. + + If {expr2} is a |String|, inside {expr2} |v:val| has the value + of the current item. For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key + of the current item and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of + the current item. For a |Blob| |v:key| has the index of the + current byte. For a |String| |v:key| has the index of the + current character. + Example: > + :call map(mylist, '"> " .. v:val .. " <"') +< This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist". + + Note that {expr2} is the result of an expression and is then + used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a + |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. You + still have to double ' quotes + + If {expr2} is a |Funcref| it is called with two arguments: + 1. The key or the index of the current item. + 2. the value of the current item. + With a legacy script lambda you don't get an error if it only + accepts one argument, but with a Vim9 lambda you get "E1106: + One argument too many", the number of arguments must match. + + The function must return the new value of the item. Example + that changes each value by "key-value": > + func KeyValue(key, val) + return a:key .. '-' .. a:val + endfunc + call map(myDict, function('KeyValue')) +< It is shorter when using a |lambda|: > + call map(myDict, {key, val -> key .. '-' .. val}) +< If you do not use "val" you can leave it out: > + call map(myDict, {key -> 'item: ' .. key}) +< If you do not use "key" you can use a short name: > + call map(myDict, {_, val -> 'item: ' .. val}) +< + The operation is done in-place for a |List| and |Dictionary|. + If you want it to remain unmodified make a copy first: > + :let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val .. "\t"') + +< Returns {expr1}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered, + or a new |Blob| or |String|. + When an error is encountered while evaluating {expr2} no + further items in {expr1} are processed. + When {expr2} is a Funcref errors inside a function are ignored, + unless it was defined with the "abort" flag. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->map(expr2) + + +maparg({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) *maparg()* + When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping + {name} in mode {mode}. The returned String has special + characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command + listing. When {dict} is TRUE a dictionary is returned, see + below. To get a list of all mappings see |maplist()|. + + When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is + returned if {dict} is FALSE, otherwise returns an empty Dict. + When the mapping for {name} is empty, then "<Nop>" is + returned. + + The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map" + command. + + {mode} can be one of these strings: + "n" Normal + "v" Visual (including Select) + "o" Operator-pending + "i" Insert + "c" Cmd-line + "s" Select + "x" Visual + "l" langmap |language-mapping| + "t" Terminal-Job + "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending + When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used. + + When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations + instead of mappings. + + When {dict} is there and it is |TRUE| return a dictionary + containing all the information of the mapping with the + following items: *mapping-dict* + "lhs" The {lhs} of the mapping as it would be typed + "lhsraw" The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes + "lhsrawalt" The {lhs} of the mapping as raw bytes, alternate + form, only present when it differs from "lhsraw" + "rhs" The {rhs} of the mapping as typed. + "silent" 1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0. + "noremap" 1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable. + "script" 1 if mapping was defined with <script>. + "expr" 1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|). + "buffer" 1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|). + "mode" Modes for which the mapping is defined. In + addition to the modes mentioned above, these + characters will be used: + " " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending + "!" Insert and Commandline mode + (|mapmode-ic|) + "sid" The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings + (|<SID>|). + "scriptversion" The version of the script. 999999 for + |Vim9| script. + "lnum" The line number in "sid", zero if unknown. + "nowait" Do not wait for other, longer mappings. + (|:map-<nowait>|). + "abbr" True if this is an abbreviation |abbreviations|. + "mode_bits" Vim's internal binary representation of "mode". + |mapset()| ignores this; only "mode" is used. + See |maplist()| for usage examples. The values + are from src/vim.h and may change in the future. + + The dictionary can be used to restore a mapping with + |mapset()|. + + The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, + then the global mappings. + This function can be used to map a key even when it's already + mapped, and have it do the original mapping too. Sketch: > + exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' .. maparg('<Tab>', 'n') + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetKey()->maparg('n') + +mapcheck({name} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *mapcheck()* + Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode + {mode}. See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in + {name}. + When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use abbreviations + instead of mappings. + A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and + with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}. + + matches mapping "a" "ab" "abc" ~ + mapcheck("a") yes yes yes + mapcheck("abc") yes yes yes + mapcheck("ax") yes no no + mapcheck("b") no no no + + The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a + mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a + mapping for {name} exactly. + When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty + String is returned. If there is one, the RHS of that mapping + is returned. If there are several mappings that start with + {name}, the RHS of one of them is returned. This will be + "<Nop>" if the RHS is empty. + The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, + then the global mappings. + This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added + without being ambiguous. Example: > + :if mapcheck("_vv") == "" + : map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR> + :endif +< This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a + mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv". + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetKey()->mapcheck('n') + + +maplist([{abbr}]) *maplist()* + Returns a |List| of all mappings. Each List item is a |Dict|, + the same as what is returned by |maparg()|, see + |mapping-dict|. When {abbr} is there and it is |TRUE| use + abbreviations instead of mappings. + + Example to show all mappings with 'MultiMatch' in rhs: > + vim9script + echo maplist()->filter( + (_, m) => match(m.rhs, 'MultiMatch') >= 0) +< It can be tricky to find mappings for particular |:map-modes|. + |mapping-dict|'s "mode_bits" can simplify this. For example, + the mode_bits for Normal, Insert or Command-line modes are + 0x19. To find all the mappings available in those modes you + can do: > + vim9script + var saved_maps = [] + for m in maplist() + if and(m.mode_bits, 0x19) != 0 + saved_maps->add(m) + endif + endfor + echo saved_maps->mapnew((_, m) => m.lhs) +< The values of the mode_bits are defined in Vim's src/vim.h + file and they can be discovered at runtime using + |:map-commands| and "maplist()". Example: > + vim9script + omap xyzzy <Nop> + var op_bit = maplist()->filter( + (_, m) => m.lhs == 'xyzzy')[0].mode_bits + ounmap xyzzy + echo printf("Operator-pending mode bit: 0x%x", op_bit) + + +mapnew({expr1}, {expr2}) *mapnew()* + Like |map()| but instead of replacing items in {expr1} a new + List or Dictionary is created and returned. {expr1} remains + unchanged. Items can still be changed by {expr2}, if you + don't want that use |deepcopy()| first. + + +mapset({mode}, {abbr}, {dict}) *mapset()* +mapset({dict}) + Restore a mapping from a dictionary, possibly returned by + |maparg()| or |maplist()|. A buffer mapping, when dict.buffer + is true, is set on the current buffer; it is up to the caller + to ensure that the intended buffer is the current buffer. This + feature allows copying mappings from one buffer to another. + The dict.mode value may restore a single mapping that covers + more than one mode, like with mode values of '!', ' ', 'nox', + or 'v'. *E1276* + + In the first form, {mode} and {abbr} should be the same as + for the call to |maparg()|. *E460* + {mode} is used to define the mode in which the mapping is set, + not the "mode" entry in {dict}. + Example for saving and restoring a mapping: > + let save_map = maparg('K', 'n', 0, 1) + nnoremap K somethingelse + ... + call mapset('n', 0, save_map) +< Note that if you are going to replace a map in several modes, + e.g. with `:map!`, you need to save/restore the mapping for + all of them, when they might differ. + + In the second form, with {dict} as the only argument, mode + and abbr are taken from the dict. + Example: > + vim9script + var save_maps = maplist()->filter( + (_, m) => m.lhs == 'K') + nnoremap K somethingelse + cnoremap K somethingelse2 + # ... + unmap K + for d in save_maps + mapset(d) + endfor + + +match({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *match()* + When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the + first item where {pat} matches. Each item is used as a + String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed. + + Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String. The result is a + Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where + {pat} matches. + + A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero. + If there is no match -1 is returned. + + For getting submatches see |matchlist()|. + Example: > + :echo match("testing", "ing") " results in 4 + :echo match([1, 'x'], '\a') " results in 1 +< See |string-match| for how {pat} is used. + *strpbrk()* + Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function. But you can do: > + :let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]') +< *strcasestr()* + Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function. But you can add + "\c" to the pattern to ignore case: > + :let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle') +< + If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index + {start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|. + The result, however, is still the index counted from the + first character/item. Example: > + :echo match("testing", "ing", 2) +< result is again "4". > + :echo match("testing", "ing", 4) +< result is again "4". > + :echo match("testing", "t", 2) +< result is "3". + For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts + {start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}. Except + when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the + {start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it + backwards compatible). + For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0. For a list + the index is counted from the end. + If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a + String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned. + + When {count} is given use the {count}'th match. When a match + is found in a String the search for the next one starts one + character further. Thus this example results in 1: > + echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2) +< In a |List| the search continues in the next item. + Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes, + see above. + + See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted. + The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of + the pattern. 'smartcase' is NOT used. The matching is always + done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty. + Note that a match at the start is preferred, thus when the + pattern is using "*" (any number of matches) it tends to find + zero matches at the start instead of a number of matches + further down in the text. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->match('word') + GetList()->match('word') +< + *matchadd()* *E290* *E798* *E799* *E801* *E957* +matchadd({group}, {pattern} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) + Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a + "match"). It will be highlighted with {group}. Returns an + identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the + match using |matchdelete()|. The ID is bound to the window. + Matching is case sensitive and magic, unless case sensitivity + or magicness are explicitly overridden in {pattern}. The + 'magic', 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options are not used. + The "Conceal" value is special, it causes the match to be + concealed. + + The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the + match. A match with a high priority will have its + highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority. + A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no + exception). If the {priority} argument is not specified, the + default priority is 10. The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero, + hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will + overrule it. Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate + mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will + always overrule syntax highlighting. + + The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific + match ID. If a specified ID is already taken, an error + message will appear and the match will not be added. An ID + is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded). IDs 1, 2 + and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|, + respectively. 3 is reserved for use by the |matchparen| + plugin. + If the {id} argument is not specified or -1, |matchadd()| + automatically chooses a free ID, which is at least 1000. + + The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom + values. Currently this is used to specify a match specific + conceal character that will be shown for |hl-Conceal| + highlighted matches. The dict can have the following members: + + conceal Special character to show instead of the + match (only for |hl-Conceal| highlighted + matches, see |:syn-cchar|) + window Instead of the current window use the + window with this number or window ID. + + The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with + the |:match| commands. + + Returns -1 on error. + + Example: > + :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green + :let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO") +< Deletion of the pattern: > + :call matchdelete(m) + +< A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are + available from |getmatches()|. All matches can be deleted in + one operation by |clearmatches()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetGroup()->matchadd('TODO') +< + *matchaddpos()* +matchaddpos({group}, {pos} [, {priority} [, {id} [, {dict}]]]) + Same as |matchadd()|, but requires a list of positions {pos} + instead of a pattern. This command is faster than |matchadd()| + because it does not require to handle regular expressions and + sets buffer line boundaries to redraw screen. It is supposed + to be used when fast match additions and deletions are + required, for example to highlight matching parentheses. + + {pos} is a list of positions. Each position can be one of + these: + - A number. This whole line will be highlighted. The first + line has number 1. + - A list with one number, e.g., [23]. The whole line with this + number will be highlighted. + - A list with two numbers, e.g., [23, 11]. The first number is + the line number, the second one is the column number (first + column is 1, the value must correspond to the byte index as + |col()| would return). The character at this position will + be highlighted. + - A list with three numbers, e.g., [23, 11, 3]. As above, but + the third number gives the length of the highlight in bytes. + + Returns -1 on error. + + Example: > + :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green + :let m = matchaddpos("MyGroup", [[23, 24], 34]) +< Deletion of the pattern: > + :call matchdelete(m) + +< Matches added by |matchaddpos()| are returned by + |getmatches()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetGroup()->matchaddpos([23, 11]) + +matcharg({nr}) *matcharg()* + Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|, + |:2match| or |:3match| command. + Return a |List| with two elements: + The name of the highlight group used + The pattern used. + When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|. + When there is no match item set returns ['', '']. + This is useful to save and restore a |:match|. + Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited + to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMatch()->matcharg() + +matchdelete({id} [, {win}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803* + Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()| + or one of the |:match| commands. Returns 0 if successful, + otherwise -1. See example for |matchadd()|. All matches can + be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|. + If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or + window ID instead of the current window. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMatch()->matchdelete() + +matchend({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchend()* + Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character + after the match. Example: > + :echo matchend("testing", "ing") +< results in "7". + *strspn()* *strcspn()* + Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can + do it with matchend(): > + :let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]') + :let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]') +< Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches. + + The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > + :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2) +< results in "7". > + :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5) +< result is "-1". + When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->matchend('word') + + +matchfuzzy({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) *matchfuzzy()* + If {list} is a list of strings, then returns a |List| with all + the strings in {list} that fuzzy match {str}. The strings in + the returned list are sorted based on the matching score. + + The optional {dict} argument always supports the following + items: + matchseq When this item is present return only matches + that contain the characters in {str} in the + given sequence. + limit Maximum number of matches in {list} to be + returned. Zero means no limit. + + If {list} is a list of dictionaries, then the optional {dict} + argument supports the following additional items: + key Key of the item which is fuzzy matched against + {str}. The value of this item should be a + string. + text_cb |Funcref| that will be called for every item + in {list} to get the text for fuzzy matching. + This should accept a dictionary item as the + argument and return the text for that item to + use for fuzzy matching. + + {str} is treated as a literal string and regular expression + matching is NOT supported. The maximum supported {str} length + is 256. + + When {str} has multiple words each separated by white space, + then the list of strings that have all the words is returned. + + If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then an + empty list is returned. If length of {str} is greater than + 256, then returns an empty list. + + When {limit} is given, matchfuzzy() will find up to this + number of matches in {list} and return them in sorted order. + + Refer to |fuzzy-matching| for more information about fuzzy + matching strings. + + Example: > + :echo matchfuzzy(["clay", "crow"], "cay") +< results in ["clay"]. > + :echo getbufinfo()->map({_, v -> v.name})->matchfuzzy("ndl") +< results in a list of buffer names fuzzy matching "ndl". > + :echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("ndl", {'key' : 'name'}) +< results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer + names fuzzy matching "ndl". > + :echo getbufinfo()->matchfuzzy("spl", + \ {'text_cb' : {v -> v.name}}) +< results in a list of buffer information dicts with buffer + names fuzzy matching "spl". > + :echo v:oldfiles->matchfuzzy("test") +< results in a list of file names fuzzy matching "test". > + :let l = readfile("buffer.c")->matchfuzzy("str") +< results in a list of lines in "buffer.c" fuzzy matching "str". > + :echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one') +< results in ['two one', 'one two']. > + :echo ['one two', 'two one']->matchfuzzy('two one', + \ {'matchseq': 1}) +< results in ['two one']. + +matchfuzzypos({list}, {str} [, {dict}]) *matchfuzzypos()* + Same as |matchfuzzy()|, but returns the list of matched + strings, the list of character positions where characters + in {str} matches and a list of matching scores. You can + use |byteidx()| to convert a character position to a byte + position. + + If {str} matches multiple times in a string, then only the + positions for the best match is returned. + + If there are no matching strings or there is an error, then a + list with three empty list items is returned. + + Example: > + :echo matchfuzzypos(['testing'], 'tsg') +< results in [['testing'], [[0, 2, 6]], [99]] > + :echo matchfuzzypos(['clay', 'lacy'], 'la') +< results in [['lacy', 'clay'], [[0, 1], [1, 2]], [153, 133]] > + :echo [{'text': 'hello', 'id' : 10}]->matchfuzzypos('ll', {'key' : 'text'}) +< results in [[{'id': 10, 'text': 'hello'}], [[2, 3]], [127]] + +matchlist({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchlist()* + Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the + list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would + return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc. + in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an + empty string is used. Example: > + echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)') +< Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', ''] + When there is no match an empty list is returned. + + You can pass in a List, but that is not very useful. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->matchlist('word') + +matchstr({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchstr()* + Same as |match()|, but return the matched string. Example: > + :echo matchstr("testing", "ing") +< results in "ing". + When there is no match "" is returned. + The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > + :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2) +< results in "ing". > + :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5) +< result is "". + When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned. + The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->matchstr('word') + +matchstrpos({expr}, {pat} [, {start} [, {count}]]) *matchstrpos()* + Same as |matchstr()|, but return the matched string, the start + position and the end position of the match. Example: > + :echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing") +< results in ["ing", 4, 7]. + When there is no match ["", -1, -1] is returned. + The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > + :echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 2) +< results in ["ing", 4, 7]. > + :echo matchstrpos("testing", "ing", 5) +< result is ["", -1, -1]. + When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item, the index + of first item where {pat} matches, the start position and the + end position of the match are returned. > + :echo matchstrpos([1, '__x'], '\a') +< result is ["x", 1, 2, 3]. + The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->matchstrpos('word') +< + + *max()* +max({expr}) Return the maximum value of all items in {expr}. Example: > + echo max([apples, pears, oranges]) + +< {expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. For a Dictionary, + it returns the maximum of all values in the Dictionary. + If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the + items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in + an error. An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->max() + + +menu_info({name} [, {mode}]) *menu_info()* + Return information about the specified menu {name} in + mode {mode}. The menu name should be specified without the + shortcut character ('&'). If {name} is "", then the top-level + menu names are returned. + + {mode} can be one of these strings: + "n" Normal + "v" Visual (including Select) + "o" Operator-pending + "i" Insert + "c" Cmd-line + "s" Select + "x" Visual + "t" Terminal-Job + "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending + "!" Insert and Cmd-line + When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used. + + Returns a |Dictionary| containing the following items: + accel menu item accelerator text |menu-text| + display display name (name without '&') + enabled v:true if this menu item is enabled + Refer to |:menu-enable| + icon name of the icon file (for toolbar) + |toolbar-icon| + iconidx index of a built-in icon + modes modes for which the menu is defined. In + addition to the modes mentioned above, these + characters will be used: + " " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending + name menu item name. + noremenu v:true if the {rhs} of the menu item is not + remappable else v:false. + priority menu order priority |menu-priority| + rhs right-hand-side of the menu item. The returned + string has special characters translated like + in the output of the ":menu" command listing. + When the {rhs} of a menu item is empty, then + "<Nop>" is returned. + script v:true if script-local remapping of {rhs} is + allowed else v:false. See |:menu-script|. + shortcut shortcut key (character after '&' in + the menu name) |menu-shortcut| + silent v:true if the menu item is created + with <silent> argument |:menu-silent| + submenus |List| containing the names of + all the submenus. Present only if the menu + item has submenus. + + Returns an empty dictionary if the menu item is not found. + + Examples: > + :echo menu_info('Edit.Cut') + :echo menu_info('File.Save', 'n') + + " Display the entire menu hierarchy in a buffer + func ShowMenu(name, pfx) + let m = menu_info(a:name) + call append(line('$'), a:pfx .. m.display) + for child in m->get('submenus', []) + call ShowMenu(a:name .. '.' .. escape(child, '.'), + \ a:pfx .. ' ') + endfor + endfunc + new + for topmenu in menu_info('').submenus + call ShowMenu(topmenu, '') + endfor +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMenuName()->menu_info('v') + + +< *min()* +min({expr}) Return the minimum value of all items in {expr}. Example: > + echo min([apples, pears, oranges]) + +< {expr} can be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. For a Dictionary, + it returns the minimum of all values in the Dictionary. + If {expr} is neither a List nor a Dictionary, or one of the + items in {expr} cannot be used as a Number this results in + an error. An empty |List| or |Dictionary| results in zero. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->min() + +< *mkdir()* *E739* +mkdir({name} [, {flags} [, {prot}]]) + Create directory {name}. + + When {flags} is present it must be a string. An empty string + has no effect. + + If {flags} contains "p" then intermediate directories are + created as necessary. + + If {flags} contains "D" then {name} is deleted at the end of + the current function, as with: > + defer delete({name}, 'd') +< + If {flags} contains "R" then {name} is deleted recursively at + the end of the current function, as with: > + defer delete({name}, 'rf') +< Note that when {name} has more than one part and "p" is used + some directories may already exist. Only the first one that + is created and what it contains is scheduled to be deleted. + E.g. when using: > + call mkdir('subdir/tmp/autoload', 'pR') +< and "subdir" already exists then "subdir/tmp" will be + scheduled for deletion, like with: > + defer delete('subdir/tmp', 'rf') +< Note that if scheduling the defer fails the directory is not + deleted. This should only happen when out of memory. + + If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of + the new directory. The default is 0o755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for + the user, readable for others). Use 0o700 to make it + unreadable for others. This is only used for the last part of + {name}. Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be + created with 0o755. + Example: > + :call mkdir($HOME .. "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0o700) + +< This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + + There is no error if the directory already exists and the "p" + flag is passed (since patch 8.0.1708). However, without the + "p" option the call will fail. + + The function result is a Number, which is TRUE if the call was + successful or FALSE if the directory creation failed or partly + failed. + + Not available on all systems. To check use: > + :if exists("*mkdir") + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->mkdir() +< + *mode()* +mode([expr]) Return a string that indicates the current mode. + If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or + a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is + returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned. + Also see |state()|. + + n Normal + no Operator-pending + nov Operator-pending (forced characterwise |o_v|) + noV Operator-pending (forced linewise |o_V|) + noCTRL-V Operator-pending (forced blockwise |o_CTRL-V|); + CTRL-V is one character + niI Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Insert-mode| + niR Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Replace-mode| + niV Normal using |i_CTRL-O| in |Virtual-Replace-mode| + nt Terminal-Normal (insert goes to Terminal-Job mode) + v Visual by character + vs Visual by character using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode + V Visual by line + Vs Visual by line using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode + CTRL-V Visual blockwise + CTRL-Vs Visual blockwise using |v_CTRL-O| in Select mode + s Select by character + S Select by line + CTRL-S Select blockwise + i Insert + ic Insert mode completion |compl-generic| + ix Insert mode |i_CTRL-X| completion + R Replace |R| + Rc Replace mode completion |compl-generic| + Rx Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion + Rv Virtual Replace |gR| + Rvc Virtual Replace mode completion |compl-generic| + Rvx Virtual Replace mode |i_CTRL-X| completion + c Command-line editing + cv Vim Ex mode |gQ| + ce Normal Ex mode |Q| + r Hit-enter prompt + rm The -- more -- prompt + r? A |:confirm| query of some sort + ! Shell or external command is executing + t Terminal-Job mode: keys go to the job + + This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used + with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns + "c" or "n". + Note that in the future more modes and more specific modes may + be added. It's better not to compare the whole string but only + the leading character(s). + Also see |visualmode()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + DoFull()->mode() + +mzeval({expr}) *mzeval()* + Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result + converted to Vim data structures. + Numbers and strings are returned as they are. + Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are + returned as Vim |Lists|. + Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys + converted to strings. + All other types are converted to string with display function. + Examples: > + :mz (define l (list 1 2 3)) + :mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l) + :echo mzeval("l") + :echo mzeval("h") +< + Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible + to {expr}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->mzeval() +< + {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature} + +nextnonblank({lnum}) *nextnonblank()* + Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum} + that is not blank. Example: > + if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java" +< When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or + below it, zero is returned. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. + See also |prevnonblank()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->nextnonblank() + +nr2char({expr} [, {utf8}]) *nr2char()* + Return a string with a single character, which has the number + value {expr}. Examples: > + nr2char(64) returns "@" + nr2char(32) returns " " +< When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. + Example for "utf-8": > + nr2char(300) returns I with bow character +< When {utf8} is TRUE, always return UTF-8 characters. + Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with + nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline + characters. nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the + string, thus results in an empty string. + To turn a list of character numbers into a string: > + let list = [65, 66, 67] + let str = join(map(list, {_, val -> nr2char(val)}), '') +< Result: "ABC" + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetNumber()->nr2char() + +or({expr}, {expr}) *or()* + Bitwise OR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted + to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. + Also see `and()` and `xor()`. + Example: > + :let bits = or(bits, 0x80) +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + :let bits = bits->or(0x80) + +< Rationale: The reason this is a function and not using the "|" + character like many languages, is that Vi has always used "|" + to separate commands. In many places it would not be clear if + "|" is an operator or a command separator. + + +pathshorten({path} [, {len}]) *pathshorten()* + Shorten directory names in the path {path} and return the + result. The tail, the file name, is kept as-is. The other + components in the path are reduced to {len} letters in length. + If {len} is omitted or smaller than 1 then 1 is used (single + letters). Leading '~' and '.' characters are kept. Examples: > + :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim') +< ~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~ +> + :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim', 2) +< ~/.vi/au/myfile.vim ~ + It doesn't matter if the path exists or not. + Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetDirectories()->pathshorten() + +perleval({expr}) *perleval()* + Evaluate Perl expression {expr} in scalar context and return + its result converted to Vim data structures. If value can't be + converted, it is returned as a string Perl representation. + Note: If you want an array or hash, {expr} must return a + reference to it. + Example: > + :echo perleval('[1 .. 4]') +< [1, 2, 3, 4] + + Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible + to {expr}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->perleval() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+perl| feature} + + +popup_ functions are documented here: |popup-functions| + + +pow({x}, {y}) *pow()* + Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|. + {x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {x} or {y} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo pow(3, 3) +< 27.0 > + :echo pow(2, 16) +< 65536.0 > + :echo pow(32, 0.20) +< 2.0 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->pow(3) + +prevnonblank({lnum}) *prevnonblank()* + Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum} + that is not blank. Example: > + let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1)) +< When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or + above it, zero is returned. + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. + Also see |nextnonblank()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetLnum()->prevnonblank() + +printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...) *printf()* + Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by + the formatted form of their respective arguments. Example: > + printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg) +< May result in: + " 99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~ + + When used as a |method| the base is passed as the second + argument: > + Compute()->printf("result: %d") +< + You can use `call()` to pass the items as a list. + + Often used items are: + %s string + %6S string right-aligned in 6 display cells + %6s string right-aligned in 6 bytes + %.9s string truncated to 9 bytes + %c single byte + %d decimal number + %5d decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters + %x hex number + %04x hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters + %X hex number using upper case letters + %o octal number + %08b binary number padded with zeros to at least 8 chars + %f floating point number as 12.23, inf, -inf or nan + %F floating point number as 12.23, INF, -INF or NAN + %e floating point number as 1.23e3, inf, -inf or nan + %E floating point number as 1.23E3, INF, -INF or NAN + %g floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value + %G floating point number, as %F or %E depending on value + %% the % character itself + + Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the + conversion type. All other characters are copied unchanged to + the result. + + The "%" starts a conversion specification. The following + arguments appear in sequence: + + % [flags] [field-width] [.precision] type + + flags + Zero or more of the following flags: + + # The value should be converted to an "alternate + form". For c, d, and s conversions, this option + has no effect. For o conversions, the precision + of the number is increased to force the first + character of the output string to a zero (except + if a zero value is printed with an explicit + precision of zero). + For b and B conversions, a non-zero result has + the string "0b" (or "0B" for B conversions) + prepended to it. + For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has + the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions) + prepended to it. + + 0 (zero) Zero padding. For all conversions the converted + value is padded on the left with zeros rather + than blanks. If a precision is given with a + numeric conversion (d, b, B, o, x, and X), the 0 + flag is ignored. + + - A negative field width flag; the converted value + is to be left adjusted on the field boundary. + The converted value is padded on the right with + blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or + zeros. A - overrides a 0 if both are given. + + ' ' (space) A blank should be left before a positive + number produced by a signed conversion (d). + + + A sign must always be placed before a number + produced by a signed conversion. A + overrides + a space if both are used. + + field-width + An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum + field width. If the converted value has fewer bytes + than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on + the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has + been given) to fill out the field width. For the S + conversion the count is in cells. + + .precision + An optional precision, in the form of a period '.' + followed by an optional digit string. If the digit + string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero. + This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for + d, o, x, and X conversions, the maximum number of + bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions, + or the maximum number of cells to be printed from a + string for S conversions. + For floating point it is the number of digits after + the decimal point. + + type + A character that specifies the type of conversion to + be applied, see below. + + A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an + asterisk '*' instead of a digit string. In this case, a + Number argument supplies the field width or precision. A + negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag + followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is + treated as though it were missing. Example: > + :echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line) +< This limits the length of the text used from "line" to + "width" bytes. + + The conversion specifiers and their meanings are: + + *printf-d* *printf-b* *printf-B* *printf-o* + *printf-x* *printf-X* + dbBoxX The Number argument is converted to signed decimal + (d), unsigned binary (b and B), unsigned octal (o), or + unsigned hexadecimal (x and X) notation. The letters + "abcdef" are used for x conversions; the letters + "ABCDEF" are used for X conversions. + The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of + digits that must appear; if the converted value + requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with + zeros. + In no case does a non-existent or small field width + cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of + a conversion is wider than the field width, the field + is expanded to contain the conversion result. + The 'h' modifier indicates the argument is 16 bits. + The 'l' modifier indicates the argument is 32 bits. + The 'L' modifier indicates the argument is 64 bits. + Generally, these modifiers are not useful. They are + ignored when type is known from the argument. + + i alias for d + D alias for ld + U alias for lu + O alias for lo + + *printf-c* + c The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the + resulting character is written. + + *printf-s* + s The text of the String argument is used. If a + precision is specified, no more bytes than the number + specified are used. + If the argument is not a String type, it is + automatically converted to text with the same format + as ":echo". + *printf-S* + S The text of the String argument is used. If a + precision is specified, no more display cells than the + number specified are used. + + *printf-f* *E807* + f F The Float argument is converted into a string of the + form 123.456. The precision specifies the number of + digits after the decimal point. When the precision is + zero the decimal point is omitted. When the precision + is not specified 6 is used. A really big number + (out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf" + or "-inf" with %f (INF or -INF with %F). + "0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan" with %f (NAN with %F). + Example: > + echo printf("%.2f", 12.115) +< 12.12 + Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries. + Use |round()| when in doubt. + + *printf-e* *printf-E* + e E The Float argument is converted into a string of the + form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'. The + precision specifies the number of digits after the + decimal point, like with 'f'. + + *printf-g* *printf-G* + g G The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the + value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0 + (exclusive). Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E' + for 'G'. When no precision is specified superfluous + zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero + immediately after the decimal point. Thus 10000000.0 + results in 1.0e7. + + *printf-%* + % A '%' is written. No argument is converted. The + complete conversion specification is "%%". + + When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also + accepted and automatically converted. + When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument + is also accepted and automatically converted. + Any other argument type results in an error message. + + *E766* *E767* + The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number + of "%" items. If there are not sufficient or too many + arguments an error is given. Up to 18 arguments can be used. + + +prompt_getprompt({buf}) *prompt_getprompt()* + Returns the effective prompt text for buffer {buf}. {buf} can + be a buffer name or number. See |prompt-buffer|. + + If the buffer doesn't exist or isn't a prompt buffer, an empty + string is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBuffer()->prompt_getprompt() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} + + +prompt_setcallback({buf}, {expr}) *prompt_setcallback()* + Set prompt callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}. When {expr} + is an empty string the callback is removed. This has only + effect if {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt". + + The callback is invoked when pressing Enter. The current + buffer will always be the prompt buffer. A new line for a + prompt is added before invoking the callback, thus the prompt + for which the callback was invoked will be in the last but one + line. + If the callback wants to add text to the buffer, it must + insert it above the last line, since that is where the current + prompt is. This can also be done asynchronously. + The callback is invoked with one argument, which is the text + that was entered at the prompt. This can be an empty string + if the user only typed Enter. + Example: > + call prompt_setcallback(bufnr(), function('s:TextEntered')) + func s:TextEntered(text) + if a:text == 'exit' || a:text == 'quit' + stopinsert + close + else + call append(line('$') - 1, 'Entered: "' .. a:text .. '"') + " Reset 'modified' to allow the buffer to be closed. + set nomodified + endif + endfunc + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBuffer()->prompt_setcallback(callback) + +< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} + +prompt_setinterrupt({buf}, {expr}) *prompt_setinterrupt()* + Set a callback for buffer {buf} to {expr}. When {expr} is an + empty string the callback is removed. This has only effect if + {buf} has 'buftype' set to "prompt". + + This callback will be invoked when pressing CTRL-C in Insert + mode. Without setting a callback Vim will exit Insert mode, + as in any buffer. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBuffer()->prompt_setinterrupt(callback) + +< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} + +prompt_setprompt({buf}, {text}) *prompt_setprompt()* + Set prompt for buffer {buf} to {text}. You most likely want + {text} to end in a space. + The result is only visible if {buf} has 'buftype' set to + "prompt". Example: > + call prompt_setprompt(bufnr(), 'command: ') +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBuffer()->prompt_setprompt('command: ') + +< {only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature} + +prop_ functions are documented here: |text-prop-functions| + +pum_getpos() *pum_getpos()* + If the popup menu (see |ins-completion-menu|) is not visible, + returns an empty |Dictionary|, otherwise, returns a + |Dictionary| with the following keys: + height nr of items visible + width screen cells + row top screen row (0 first row) + col leftmost screen column (0 first col) + size total nr of items + scrollbar |TRUE| if scrollbar is visible + + The values are the same as in |v:event| during + |CompleteChanged|. + +pumvisible() *pumvisible()* + Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero + otherwise. See |ins-completion-menu|. + This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the + popup menu. + +py3eval({expr}) *py3eval()* + Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result + converted to Vim data structures. + Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are + copied though, Unicode strings are additionally converted to + 'encoding'). + Lists are represented as Vim |List| type. + Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with + keys converted to strings. + Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible + to {expr}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->py3eval() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature} + + *E858* *E859* +pyeval({expr}) *pyeval()* + Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result + converted to Vim data structures. + Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are + copied though). + Lists are represented as Vim |List| type. + Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type, + non-string keys result in error. + Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible + to {expr}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->pyeval() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+python| feature} + +pyxeval({expr}) *pyxeval()* + Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result + converted to Vim data structures. + Uses Python 2 or 3, see |python_x| and 'pyxversion'. + See also: |pyeval()|, |py3eval()| + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->pyxeval() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+python| or the + |+python3| feature} + +rand([{expr}]) *rand()* *random* + Return a pseudo-random Number generated with an xoshiro128** + algorithm using seed {expr}. The returned number is 32 bits, + also on 64 bits systems, for consistency. + {expr} can be initialized by |srand()| and will be updated by + rand(). If {expr} is omitted, an internal seed value is used + and updated. + Returns -1 if {expr} is invalid. + + Examples: > + :echo rand() + :let seed = srand() + :echo rand(seed) + :echo rand(seed) % 16 " random number 0 - 15 +< + + *E726* *E727* +range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) *range()* + Returns a |List| with Numbers: + - If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1] + - If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}] + - If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ..., + {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not + producing a value past {max}). + When the maximum is one before the start the result is an + empty list. When the maximum is more than one before the + start this is an error. + Examples: > + range(4) " [0, 1, 2, 3] + range(2, 4) " [2, 3, 4] + range(2, 9, 3) " [2, 5, 8] + range(2, -2, -1) " [2, 1, 0, -1, -2] + range(0) " [] + range(2, 0) " error! +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetExpr()->range() +< + +readblob({fname} [, {offset} [, {size}]]) *readblob()* + Read file {fname} in binary mode and return a |Blob|. + If {offset} is specified, read the file from the specified + offset. If it is a negative value, it is used as an offset + from the end of the file. E.g., to read the last 12 bytes: > + readblob('file.bin', -12) +< If {size} is specified, only the specified size will be read. + E.g. to read the first 100 bytes of a file: > + readblob('file.bin', 0, 100) +< If {size} is -1 or omitted, the whole data starting from + {offset} will be read. + This can be also used to read the data from a character device + on Unix when {size} is explicitly set. Only if the device + supports seeking {offset} can be used. Otherwise it should be + zero. E.g. to read 10 bytes from a serial console: > + readblob('/dev/ttyS0', 0, 10) +< When the file can't be opened an error message is given and + the result is an empty |Blob|. + When the offset is beyond the end of the file the result is an + empty blob. + When trying to read more bytes than are available the result + is truncated. + Also see |readfile()| and |writefile()|. + + +readdir({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) *readdir()* + Return a list with file and directory names in {directory}. + You can also use |glob()| if you don't need to do complicated + things, such as limiting the number of matches. + The list will be sorted (case sensitive), see the {dict} + argument below for changing the sort order. + + When {expr} is omitted all entries are included. + When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do: + If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will + be handled. + If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be + added to the list. + If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added + to the list. + The entries "." and ".." are always excluded. + Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to the entry name. + When {expr} is a function the name is passed as the argument. + For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": > + readdir(dirname, {n -> n =~ '.txt$'}) +< To skip hidden and backup files: > + readdir(dirname, {n -> n !~ '^\.\|\~$'}) +< *E857* + The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom + values. Currently this is used to specify if and how sorting + should be performed. The dict can have the following members: + + sort How to sort the result returned from the system. + Valid values are: + "none" do not sort (fastest method) + "case" sort case sensitive (byte value of + each character, technically, using + strcmp()) (default) + "icase" sort case insensitive (technically + using strcasecmp()) + "collate" sort using the collation order + of the "POSIX" or "C" |locale| + (technically using strcoll()) + Other values are silently ignored. + + For example, to get a list of all files in the current + directory without sorting the individual entries: > + readdir('.', '1', #{sort: 'none'}) +< If you want to get a directory tree: > + function! s:tree(dir) + return {a:dir : map(readdir(a:dir), + \ {_, x -> isdirectory(x) ? + \ {x : s:tree(a:dir .. '/' .. x)} : x})} + endfunction + echo s:tree(".") +< + Returns an empty List on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetDirName()->readdir() +< +readdirex({directory} [, {expr} [, {dict}]]) *readdirex()* + Extended version of |readdir()|. + Return a list of Dictionaries with file and directory + information in {directory}. + This is useful if you want to get the attributes of file and + directory at the same time as getting a list of a directory. + This is much faster than calling |readdir()| then calling + |getfperm()|, |getfsize()|, |getftime()| and |getftype()| for + each file and directory especially on MS-Windows. + The list will by default be sorted by name (case sensitive), + the sorting can be changed by using the optional {dict} + argument, see |readdir()|. + + The Dictionary for file and directory information has the + following items: + group Group name of the entry. (Only on Unix) + name Name of the entry. + perm Permissions of the entry. See |getfperm()|. + size Size of the entry. See |getfsize()|. + time Timestamp of the entry. See |getftime()|. + type Type of the entry. + On Unix, almost same as |getftype()| except: + Symlink to a dir "linkd" + Other symlink "link" + On MS-Windows: + Normal file "file" + Directory "dir" + Junction "junction" + Symlink to a dir "linkd" + Other symlink "link" + Other reparse point "reparse" + user User name of the entry's owner. (Only on Unix) + On Unix, if the entry is a symlink, the Dictionary includes + the information of the target (except the "type" item). + On MS-Windows, it includes the information of the symlink + itself because of performance reasons. + + When {expr} is omitted all entries are included. + When {expr} is given, it is evaluated to check what to do: + If {expr} results in -1 then no further entries will + be handled. + If {expr} results in 0 then this entry will not be + added to the list. + If {expr} results in 1 then this entry will be added + to the list. + The entries "." and ".." are always excluded. + Each time {expr} is evaluated |v:val| is set to a |Dictionary| + of the entry. + When {expr} is a function the entry is passed as the argument. + For example, to get a list of files ending in ".txt": > + readdirex(dirname, {e -> e.name =~ '.txt$'}) +< + For example, to get a list of all files in the current + directory without sorting the individual entries: > + readdirex(dirname, '1', #{sort: 'none'}) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetDirName()->readdirex() +< + + *readfile()* +readfile({fname} [, {type} [, {max}]]) + Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file + as an item. Lines are broken at NL characters. Macintosh + files separated with CR will result in a single long line + (unless a NL appears somewhere). + All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character. + When {type} contains "b" binary mode is used: + - When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is + added. + - No CR characters are removed. + Otherwise: + - CR characters that appear before a NL are removed. + - Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter. + - When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is + removed from the text. + When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines + to be read. Useful if you only want to check the first ten + lines of a file: > + :for line in readfile(fname, '', 10) + : if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif + :endfor +< When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file + are returned, or as many as there are. + When {max} is zero the result is an empty list. + Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory. + Also note that there is no recognition of encoding. Read a + file into a buffer if you need to. + Deprecated (use |readblob()| instead): When {type} contains + "B" a |Blob| is returned with the binary data of the file + unmodified. + When the file can't be opened an error message is given and + the result is an empty list. + Also see |writefile()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFileName()->readfile() + +reduce({object}, {func} [, {initial}]) *reduce()* *E998* + {func} is called for every item in {object}, which can be a + |String|, |List| or a |Blob|. {func} is called with two + arguments: the result so far and current item. After + processing all items the result is returned. *E1132* + + {initial} is the initial result. When omitted, the first item + in {object} is used and {func} is first called for the second + item. If {initial} is not given and {object} is empty no + result can be computed, an E998 error is given. + + Examples: > + echo reduce([1, 3, 5], { acc, val -> acc + val }) + echo reduce(['x', 'y'], { acc, val -> acc .. val }, 'a') + echo reduce(0z1122, { acc, val -> 2 * acc + val }) + echo reduce('xyz', { acc, val -> acc .. ',' .. val }) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + echo mylist->reduce({ acc, val -> acc + val }, 0) + + +reg_executing() *reg_executing()* + Returns the single letter name of the register being executed. + Returns an empty string when no register is being executed. + See |@|. + +reg_recording() *reg_recording()* + Returns the single letter name of the register being recorded. + Returns an empty string when not recording. See |q|. + +reltime() +reltime({start}) +reltime({start}, {end}) *reltime()* + Return an item that represents a time value. The item is a + list with items that depend on the system. In Vim 9 script + list<any> can be used. + The item can be passed to |reltimestr()| to convert it to a + string or |reltimefloat()| to convert to a Float. For + example, to see the time spent in function Work(): > + var startTime = reltime() + Work() + echo startTime->reltime()->reltimestr() +< + Without an argument reltime() returns the current time (the + representation is system-dependent, it can not be used as the + wall-clock time, see |localtime()| for that). + With one argument is returns the time passed since the time + specified in the argument. + With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start} + and {end}. + + The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by + reltime(). If there is an error an empty List is returned in + legacy script, in Vim9 script an error is given. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetStart()->reltime() +< + {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} + +reltimefloat({time}) *reltimefloat()* + Return a Float that represents the time value of {time}. + Example: > + let start = reltime() + call MyFunction() + let seconds = reltimefloat(reltime(start)) +< See the note of reltimestr() about overhead. + Also see |profiling|. + If there is an error 0.0 is returned in legacy script, in Vim9 + script an error is given. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + reltime(start)->reltimefloat() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} + +reltimestr({time}) *reltimestr()* + Return a String that represents the time value of {time}. + This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of + microseconds. Example: > + let start = reltime() + call MyFunction() + echo reltimestr(reltime(start)) +< Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time. + The accuracy depends on the system. + Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely. You + can use split() to remove it. > + echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0] +< Also see |profiling|. + If there is an error an empty string is returned in legacy + script, in Vim9 script an error is given. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + reltime(start)->reltimestr() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} + + *remote_expr()* *E449* +remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar} [, {timeout}]]) + Send the {string} to {server}. The {server} argument is a + string, also see |{server}|. + + The string is sent as an expression and the result is returned + after evaluation. The result must be a String or a |List|. A + |List| is turned into a String by joining the items with a + line break in between (not at the end), like with join(expr, + "\n"). + + If {idvar} is present and not empty, it is taken as the name + of a variable and a {serverid} for later use with + |remote_read()| is stored there. + + If {timeout} is given the read times out after this many + seconds. Otherwise a timeout of 600 seconds is used. + + See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. + This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} + Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued + and the result will be the empty string. + + Variables will be evaluated in the global namespace, + independent of a function currently being active. Except + when in debug mode, then local function variables and + arguments can be evaluated. + + Examples: > + :echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2") + :echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax") +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + ServerName()->remote_expr(expr) + +remote_foreground({server}) *remote_foreground()* + Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground. + The {server} argument is a string, also see |{server}|. + This works like: > + remote_expr({server}, "foreground()") +< Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work + around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server + to bring itself to the foreground. + Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized, + like foreground() does. + This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + ServerName()->remote_foreground() + +< {only in the Win32, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the + Win32 console version} + + +remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) *remote_peek()* + Returns a positive number if there are available strings + from {serverid}. Copies any reply string into the variable + {retvar} if specified. {retvar} must be a string with the + name of a variable. + Returns zero if none are available. + Returns -1 if something is wrong. + See also |clientserver|. + This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} + Examples: > + :let repl = "" + :echo "PEEK: " .. remote_peek(id, "repl") .. ": " .. repl + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + ServerId()->remote_peek() + +remote_read({serverid}, [{timeout}]) *remote_read()* + Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume + it. Unless a {timeout} in seconds is given, it blocks until a + reply is available. Returns an empty string, if a reply is + not available or on error. + See also |clientserver|. + This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} + Example: > + :echo remote_read(id) + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + ServerId()->remote_read() +< + *remote_send()* *E241* +remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) + Send the {string} to {server}. The {server} argument is a + string, also see |{server}|. + + The string is sent as input keys and the function returns + immediately. At the Vim server the keys are not mapped + |:map|. + + If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable + and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored + there. + + See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. + This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} + + Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess + up the display. + Examples: > + :echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply " .. file, "serverid") .. + \ remote_read(serverid) + + :autocmd NONE RemoteReply * + \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>")) + :echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo " .. + \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>') +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + ServerName()->remote_send(keys) +< + *remote_startserver()* *E941* *E942* +remote_startserver({name}) + Become the server {name}. This fails if already running as a + server, when |v:servername| is not empty. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + ServerName()->remote_startserver() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} + +remove({list}, {idx}) +remove({list}, {idx}, {end}) *remove()* + Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and + return the item. + With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and + return a |List| with these items. When {idx} points to the same + item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end} + points to an item before {idx} this is an error. + See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}. + Returns zero on error. + Example: > + :echo "last item: " .. remove(mylist, -1) + :call remove(mylist, 0, 9) +< + Use |delete()| to remove a file. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->remove(idx) + +remove({blob}, {idx}) +remove({blob}, {idx}, {end}) + Without {end}: Remove the byte at {idx} from |Blob| {blob} and + return the byte. + With {end}: Remove bytes from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and + return a |Blob| with these bytes. When {idx} points to the same + byte as {end} a |Blob| with one byte is returned. When {end} + points to a byte before {idx} this is an error. + Returns zero on error. + Example: > + :echo "last byte: " .. remove(myblob, -1) + :call remove(mylist, 0, 9) + +remove({dict}, {key}) + Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key} and return it. + Example: > + :echo "removed " .. remove(dict, "one") +< If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error. + Returns zero on error. + +rename({from}, {to}) *rename()* + Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}. This + should also work to move files across file systems. The + result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed + successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed. + NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning. + This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetOldName()->rename(newname) + +repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()* + Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated + result. Example: > + :let separator = repeat('-', 80) +< When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty. + When {expr} is a |List| or a |Blob| the result is {expr} + concatenated {count} times. Example: > + :let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3) +< Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b']. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->repeat(count) + +resolve({filename}) *resolve()* *E655* + On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file), + returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form. + When {filename} is a symbolic link or junction point, return + the full path to the target. If the target of junction is + removed, return {filename}. + On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path + components of {filename} and return the simplified result. + To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is + stopped after 100 iterations. + On other systems, return the simplified {filename}. + The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|. + resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the + current directory (provided the result is still a relative + path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->resolve() + +reverse({object}) *reverse()* + Reverse the order of items in {object} in-place. + {object} can be a |List| or a |Blob|. + Returns {object}. + Returns zero if {object} is not a List or a Blob. + If you want an object to remain unmodified make a copy first: > + :let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist)) +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->reverse() + +round({expr}) *round()* + Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it + as a |Float|. If {expr} lies halfway between two integral + values, then use the larger one (away from zero). + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + echo round(0.456) +< 0.0 > + echo round(4.5) +< 5.0 > + echo round(-4.5) +< -5.0 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->round() + +rubyeval({expr}) *rubyeval()* + Evaluate Ruby expression {expr} and return its result + converted to Vim data structures. + Numbers, floats and strings are returned as they are (strings + are copied though). + Arrays are represented as Vim |List| type. + Hashes are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type. + Other objects are represented as strings resulted from their + "Object#to_s" method. + Note that in a `:def` function local variables are not visible + to {expr}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRubyExpr()->rubyeval() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+ruby| feature} + +screenattr({row}, {col}) *screenattr()* + Like |screenchar()|, but return the attribute. This is a rather + arbitrary number that can only be used to compare to the + attribute at other positions. + Returns -1 when row or col is out of range. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRow()->screenattr(col) + +screenchar({row}, {col}) *screenchar()* + The result is a Number, which is the character at position + [row, col] on the screen. This works for every possible + screen position, also status lines, window separators and the + command line. The top left position is row one, column one + The character excludes composing characters. For double-byte + encodings it may only be the first byte. + This is mainly to be used for testing. + Returns -1 when row or col is out of range. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRow()->screenchar(col) + +screenchars({row}, {col}) *screenchars()* + The result is a |List| of Numbers. The first number is the same + as what |screenchar()| returns. Further numbers are + composing characters on top of the base character. + This is mainly to be used for testing. + Returns an empty List when row or col is out of range. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRow()->screenchars(col) + +screencol() *screencol()* + The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of + the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1. + This function is mainly used for testing. + + Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used + in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the + column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is + executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of + the following mappings: > + nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom " .. screencol() .. "\n" + nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR> + nnoremap GG <Cmd>echom screencol()<CR> +< +screenpos({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) *screenpos()* + The result is a Dict with the screen position of the text + character in window {winid} at buffer line {lnum} and column + {col}. {col} is a one-based byte index. + The Dict has these members: + row screen row + col first screen column + endcol last screen column + curscol cursor screen column + If the specified position is not visible, all values are zero. + The "endcol" value differs from "col" when the character + occupies more than one screen cell. E.g. for a Tab "col" can + be 1 and "endcol" can be 8. + The "curscol" value is where the cursor would be placed. For + a Tab it would be the same as "endcol", while for a double + width character it would be the same as "col". + The |conceal| feature is ignored here, the column numbers are + as if 'conceallevel' is zero. You can set the cursor to the + right position and use |screencol()| to get the value with + |conceal| taken into account. + If the position is in a closed fold the screen position of the + first character is returned, {col} is not used. + Returns an empty Dict if {winid} is invalid. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->screenpos(lnum, col) + +screenrow() *screenrow()* + The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the + cursor. The top line has number one. + This function is mainly used for testing. + Alternatively you can use |winline()|. + + Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|. + +screenstring({row}, {col}) *screenstring()* + The result is a String that contains the base character and + any composing characters at position [row, col] on the screen. + This is like |screenchars()| but returning a String with the + characters. + This is mainly to be used for testing. + Returns an empty String when row or col is out of range. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetRow()->screenstring(col) +< + *search()* +search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) + Search for regexp pattern {pattern}. The search starts at the + cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it). + + When a match has been found its line number is returned. + If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't + move. No error message is given. + + {flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags: + 'b' search Backward instead of forward + 'c' accept a match at the Cursor position + 'e' move to the End of the match + 'n' do Not move the cursor + 'p' return number of matching sub-Pattern (see below) + 's' Set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor + 'w' Wrap around the end of the file + 'W' don't Wrap around the end of the file + 'z' start searching at the cursor column instead of zero + If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies. + + If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the + cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n' + flag. + + 'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used. + + When the 'z' flag is not given, forward searching always + starts in column zero and then matches before the cursor are + skipped. When the 'c' flag is present in 'cpo' the next + search starts after the match. Without the 'c' flag the next + search starts one column after the start of the match. This + matters for overlapping matches. See |cpo-c|. You can also + insert "\ze" to change where the match ends, see |/\ze|. + + When searching backwards and the 'z' flag is given then the + search starts in column zero, thus no match in the current + line will be found (unless wrapping around the end of the + file). + + When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops + after searching this line. This is useful to restrict the + search to a range of lines. Examples: > + let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0")) + let end = search('END', '', line("w$")) +< When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies + that the search does not wrap around the end of the file. + A zero value is equal to not giving the argument. + *E1285* *E1286* *E1287* *E1288* *E1289* + When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when + more than this many milliseconds have passed. Thus when + {timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second. + The value must not be negative. A zero value is like not + giving the argument. + {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} + + If the {skip} expression is given it is evaluated with the + cursor positioned on the start of a match. If it evaluates to + non-zero this match is skipped. This can be used, for + example, to skip a match in a comment or a string. + {skip} can be a string, which is evaluated as an expression, a + function reference or a lambda. + When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted. + When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted + and -1 returned. + *search()-sub-match* + With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the + first sub-match in \(\). One if none of them matched but the + whole pattern did match. + To get the column number too use |searchpos()|. + + The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n' + flag is used. + + Example (goes over all files in the argument list): > + :let n = 1 + :while n <= argc() " loop over all files in arglist + : exe "argument " .. n + : " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the + : " first search to find match at start of file + : normal G$ + : let flags = "w" + : while search("foo", flags) > 0 + : s/foo/bar/g + : let flags = "W" + : endwhile + : update " write the file if modified + : let n = n + 1 + :endwhile +< + Example for using some flags: > + :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe') +< This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif" + under or after the cursor. Because of the 'p' flag, it + returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0 + if the search fails. With the cursor on the first word of the + line: + if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~ + the function returns 1. Without the 'c' flag, the function + finds the "endif" and returns 3. The same thing happens + without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if". + The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPattern()->search() + +searchcount([{options}]) *searchcount()* + Get or update the last search count, like what is displayed + without the "S" flag in 'shortmess'. This works even if + 'shortmess' does contain the "S" flag. + + This returns a |Dictionary|. The dictionary is empty if the + previous pattern was not set and "pattern" was not specified. + + key type meaning ~ + current |Number| current position of match; + 0 if the cursor position is + before the first match + exact_match |Boolean| 1 if "current" is matched on + "pos", otherwise 0 + total |Number| total count of matches found + incomplete |Number| 0: search was fully completed + 1: recomputing was timed out + 2: max count exceeded + + For {options} see further down. + + To get the last search count when |n| or |N| was pressed, call + this function with `recompute: 0` . This sometimes returns + wrong information because |n| and |N|'s maximum count is 99. + If it exceeded 99 the result must be max count + 1 (100). If + you want to get correct information, specify `recompute: 1`: > + + " result == maxcount + 1 (100) when many matches + let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0}) + + " Below returns correct result (recompute defaults + " to 1) + let result = searchcount() +< + The function is useful to add the count to 'statusline': > + function! LastSearchCount() abort + let result = searchcount(#{recompute: 0}) + if empty(result) + return '' + endif + if result.incomplete ==# 1 " timed out + return printf(' /%s [?/??]', @/) + elseif result.incomplete ==# 2 " max count exceeded + if result.total > result.maxcount && + \ result.current > result.maxcount + return printf(' /%s [>%d/>%d]', @/, + \ result.current, result.total) + elseif result.total > result.maxcount + return printf(' /%s [%d/>%d]', @/, + \ result.current, result.total) + endif + endif + return printf(' /%s [%d/%d]', @/, + \ result.current, result.total) + endfunction + let &statusline ..= '%{LastSearchCount()}' + + " Or if you want to show the count only when + " 'hlsearch' was on + " let &statusline ..= + " \ '%{v:hlsearch ? LastSearchCount() : ""}' +< + You can also update the search count, which can be useful in a + |CursorMoved| or |CursorMovedI| autocommand: > + + autocmd CursorMoved,CursorMovedI * + \ let s:searchcount_timer = timer_start( + \ 200, function('s:update_searchcount')) + function! s:update_searchcount(timer) abort + if a:timer ==# s:searchcount_timer + call searchcount(#{ + \ recompute: 1, maxcount: 0, timeout: 100}) + redrawstatus + endif + endfunction +< + This can also be used to count matched texts with specified + pattern in the current buffer using "pattern": > + + " Count '\<foo\>' in this buffer + " (Note that it also updates search count) + let result = searchcount(#{pattern: '\<foo\>'}) + + " To restore old search count by old pattern, + " search again + call searchcount() +< + {options} must be a |Dictionary|. It can contain: + key type meaning ~ + recompute |Boolean| if |TRUE|, recompute the count + like |n| or |N| was executed. + otherwise returns the last + computed result (when |n| or + |N| was used when "S" is not + in 'shortmess', or this + function was called). + (default: |TRUE|) + pattern |String| recompute if this was given + and different with |@/|. + this works as same as the + below command is executed + before calling this function > + let @/ = pattern +< (default: |@/|) + timeout |Number| 0 or negative number is no + timeout. timeout milliseconds + for recomputing the result + (default: 0) + maxcount |Number| 0 or negative number is no + limit. max count of matched + text while recomputing the + result. if search exceeded + total count, "total" value + becomes `maxcount + 1` + (default: 99) + pos |List| `[lnum, col, off]` value + when recomputing the result. + this changes "current" result + value. see |cursor()|, + |getpos()| + (default: cursor's position) + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetSearchOpts()->searchcount() +< +searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) *searchdecl()* + Search for the declaration of {name}. + + With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find + first match in the file. Otherwise it works like |gd|, find + first match in the function. + + With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block + that ends before the cursor position are ignored. Avoids + finding variable declarations only valid in another scope. + + Moves the cursor to the found match. + Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. + Example: > + if searchdecl('myvar') == 0 + echo getline('.') + endif +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->searchdecl() +< + *searchpair()* +searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} + [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) + Search for the match of a nested start-end pair. This can be + used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other + if/endif pairs in between are ignored. + The search starts at the cursor. The default is to search + forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward. + If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the + line number is returned. If no match is found 0 or -1 is + returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is + given. + + {start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|. They + must not contain \( \) pairs. Use of \%( \) is allowed. When + {middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either + direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair. A + typical use is: > + searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>') +< By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped. + + {flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with + |search()|. Additionally: + 'r' Repeat until no more matches found; will find the + outer pair. Implies the 'W' flag. + 'm' Return number of matches instead of line number with + the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used. + Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to + avoid wrapping around the end of the file. + + When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the + {skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on + the start of the match. It should return non-zero if this + match is to be skipped. E.g., because it is inside a comment + or a string. + When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted. + When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted + and -1 returned. + {skip} can be a string, a lambda, a funcref or a partial. + Anything else makes the function fail. + In a `:def` function when the {skip} argument is a string + constant it is compiled into instructions. + + For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|. + + The value of 'ignorecase' is used. 'magic' is ignored, the + patterns are used like it's on. + + The search starts exactly at the cursor. A match with + {start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the + direction of searching, is the first one found. Example: > + if 1 + if 2 + endif 2 + endif 1 +< When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and + searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found. When starting on + the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be + found. That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and + then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to + "endif 2". + When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character, + it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so + that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds + the matching start. + + Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: > + + :echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W', + \ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""') + +< The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is + to be found. Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid + having to double the backslashes. The skip expression only + catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command. + Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a + match. + Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": > + + :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW') + +< This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a + match is to be found. To reject matches that syntax + highlighting recognized as strings: > + + :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', + \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"') +< + *searchpairpos()* +searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} + [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) + Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and + column position of the match. The first element of the |List| + is the line number and the second element is the byte index of + the column position of the match. If no match is found, + returns [0, 0]. > + + :let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n') +< + See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example. + + *searchpos()* +searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout} [, {skip}]]]]) + Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and + column position of the match. The first element of the |List| + is the line number and the second element is the byte index of + the column position of the match. If no match is found, + returns [0, 0]. + Example: > + :let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n') + +< When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with + the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|. Example: > + :let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np') +< In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is + found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPattern()->searchpos() + +server2client({clientid}, {string}) *server2client()* + Send a reply string to {clientid}. The most recent {clientid} + that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>"). + {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} + Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. + Note: + This id has to be stored before the next command can be + received. I.e. before returning from the received command and + before calling any commands that waits for input. + See also |clientserver|. + Example: > + :echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO") + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetClientId()->server2client(string) +< +serverlist() *serverlist()* + Return a list of available server names, one per line. + When there are no servers or the information is not available + an empty string is returned. See also |clientserver|. + {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} + Example: > + :echo serverlist() +< +setbufline({buf}, {lnum}, {text}) *setbufline()* + Set line {lnum} to {text} in buffer {buf}. This works like + |setline()| for the specified buffer. + + This function works only for loaded buffers. First call + |bufload()| if needed. + + To insert lines use |appendbufline()|. + Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared. + + {text} can be a string to set one line, or a List of strings + to set multiple lines. If the List extends below the last + line then those lines are added. If the List is empty then + nothing is changed and zero is returned. + + For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. + + {lnum} is used like with |setline()|. + Use "$" to refer to the last line in buffer {buf}. + When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be + added below the last line. + + When {buf} is not a valid buffer, the buffer is not loaded or + {lnum} is not valid then 1 is returned. In |Vim9| script an + error is given. + On success 0 is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + third argument: > + GetText()->setbufline(buf, lnum) + +setbufvar({buf}, {varname}, {val}) *setbufvar()* + Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {buf} to + {val}. + This also works for a global or local window option, but it + doesn't work for a global or local window variable. + For a local window option the global value is unchanged. + For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. + The {varname} argument is a string. + Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used. + Examples: > + :call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1) + :call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar") +< This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + third argument: > + GetValue()->setbufvar(buf, varname) + + +setcellwidths({list}) *setcellwidths()* + Specify overrides for cell widths of character ranges. This + tells Vim how wide characters are when displayed in the + terminal, counted in screen cells. The values override + 'ambiwidth'. Example: > + call setcellwidths([ + \ [0x111, 0x111, 1], + \ [0x2194, 0x2199, 2], + \ ]) + +< The {list} argument is a List of Lists with each three + numbers: [{low}, {high}, {width}]. *E1109* *E1110* + {low} and {high} can be the same, in which case this refers to + one character. Otherwise it is the range of characters from + {low} to {high} (inclusive). *E1111* *E1114* + Only characters with value 0x80 and higher can be used. + + {width} must be either 1 or 2, indicating the character width + in screen cells. *E1112* + An error is given if the argument is invalid, also when a + range overlaps with another. *E1113* + + If the new value causes 'fillchars' or 'listchars' to become + invalid it is rejected and an error is given. + + To clear the overrides pass an empty {list}: > + setcellwidths([]); + +< You can use the script $VIMRUNTIME/tools/emoji_list.vim to see + the effect for known emoji characters. Move the cursor + through the text to check if the cell widths of your terminal + match with what Vim knows about each emoji. If it doesn't + look right you need to adjust the {list} argument. + + +setcharpos({expr}, {list}) *setcharpos()* + Same as |setpos()| but uses the specified column number as the + character index instead of the byte index in the line. + + Example: + With the text "여보세요" in line 8: > + call setcharpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0]) +< positions the cursor on the fourth character '요'. > + call setpos('.', [0, 8, 4, 0]) +< positions the cursor on the second character '보'. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPosition()->setcharpos('.') + +setcharsearch({dict}) *setcharsearch()* + Set the current character search information to {dict}, + which contains one or more of the following entries: + + char character which will be used for a subsequent + |,| or |;| command; an empty string clears the + character search + forward direction of character search; 1 for forward, + 0 for backward + until type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T| + character search, 0 for an |f| or |F| + character search + + This can be useful to save/restore a user's character search + from a script: > + :let prevsearch = getcharsearch() + :" Perform a command which clobbers user's search + :call setcharsearch(prevsearch) +< Also see |getcharsearch()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + SavedSearch()->setcharsearch() + +setcmdline({str} [, {pos}]) *setcmdline()* + Set the command line to {str} and set the cursor position to + {pos}. + If {pos} is omitted, the cursor is positioned after the text. + Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command + line. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->setcmdline() + +setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()* + Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position + {pos}. The first position is 1. + Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position. + Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use + |c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='. For + |c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is + set after the command line is set to the expression. For + |c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but + before inserting the resulting text. + When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the + line. A number smaller than one has undefined results. + Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command + line. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPos()->setcmdpos() + +setcursorcharpos({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *setcursorcharpos()* +setcursorcharpos({list}) + Same as |cursor()| but uses the specified column number as the + character index instead of the byte index in the line. + + Example: + With the text "여보세요" in line 4: > + call setcursorcharpos(4, 3) +< positions the cursor on the third character '세'. > + call cursor(4, 3) +< positions the cursor on the first character '여'. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetCursorPos()->setcursorcharpos() + + +setenv({name}, {val}) *setenv()* + Set environment variable {name} to {val}. Example: > + call setenv('HOME', '/home/myhome') + +< When {val} is |v:null| the environment variable is deleted. + See also |expr-env|. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetPath()->setenv('PATH') + +setfperm({fname}, {mode}) *setfperm()* *chmod* + Set the file permissions for {fname} to {mode}. + {mode} must be a string with 9 characters. It is of the form + "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of "rwx" flags represent, in + turn, the permissions of the owner of the file, the group the + file belongs to, and other users. A '-' character means the + permission is off, any other character means on. Multi-byte + characters are not supported. + + For example "rw-r-----" means read-write for the user, + readable by the group, not accessible by others. "xx-x-----" + would do the same thing. + + Returns non-zero for success, zero for failure. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFilename()->setfperm(mode) +< + To read permissions see |getfperm()|. + + +setline({lnum}, {text}) *setline()* + Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}. To insert + lines use |append()|. To set lines in another buffer use + |setbufline()|. Any text properties in {lnum} are cleared. + + {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. + When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be + added below the last line. + {text} can be any type or a List of any type, each item is + converted to a String. When {text} is an empty List then + nothing is changed and FALSE is returned. + + If this succeeds, FALSE is returned. If this fails (most likely + because {lnum} is invalid) TRUE is returned. + In |Vim9| script an error is given if {lnum} is invalid. + + Example: > + :call setline(5, strftime("%c")) + +< When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines + will be set to the items in the list. Example: > + :call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']) +< This is equivalent to: > + :for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']] + : call setline(n, l) + :endfor + +< Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetText()->setline(lnum) + +setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action} [, {what}]]) *setloclist()* + Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}. + {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + When {nr} is zero the current window is used. + + For a location list window, the displayed location list is + modified. For an invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned. + Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|. + Also see |location-list|. + + For {action} see |setqflist-action|. + + If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then + only the items listed in {what} are set. Refer to |setqflist()| + for the list of supported keys in {what}. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetLoclist()->setloclist(winnr) + +setmatches({list} [, {win}]) *setmatches()* + Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()| for the + current window. Returns 0 if successful, otherwise -1. All + current matches are cleared before the list is restored. See + example for |getmatches()|. + If {win} is specified, use the window with this number or + window ID instead of the current window. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMatches()->setmatches() +< + *setpos()* +setpos({expr}, {list}) + Set the position for String {expr}. Possible values: + . the cursor + 'x mark x + + {list} must be a |List| with four or five numbers: + [bufnum, lnum, col, off] + [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant] + + "bufnum" is the buffer number. Zero can be used for the + current buffer. When setting an uppercase mark "bufnum" is + used for the mark position. For other marks it specifies the + buffer to set the mark in. You can use the |bufnr()| function + to turn a file name into a buffer number. + For setting the cursor and the ' mark "bufnum" is ignored, + since these are associated with a window, not a buffer. + Does not change the jumplist. + + "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first + column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. If "col" is + smaller than 1 then 1 is used. To use the character count + instead of the byte count, use |setcharpos()|. + + The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then + it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the + character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last + character. + + The "curswant" number is only used when setting the cursor + position. It sets the preferred column for when moving the + cursor vertically. When the "curswant" number is missing the + preferred column is not set. When it is present and setting a + mark position it is not used. + + Note that for '< and '> changing the line number may result in + the marks to be effectively be swapped, so that '< is always + before '>. + + Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. + An error message is given if {expr} is invalid. + + Also see |setcharpos()|, |getpos()| and |getcurpos()|. + + This does not restore the preferred column for moving + vertically; if you set the cursor position with this, |j| and + |k| motions will jump to previous columns! Use |cursor()| to + also set the preferred column. Also see the "curswant" key in + |winrestview()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPosition()->setpos('.') + +setqflist({list} [, {action} [, {what}]]) *setqflist()* + Create or replace or add to the quickfix list. + + If the optional {what} dictionary argument is supplied, then + only the items listed in {what} are set. The first {list} + argument is ignored. See below for the supported items in + {what}. + *setqflist-what* + When {what} is not present, the items in {list} are used. Each + item must be a dictionary. Non-dictionary items in {list} are + ignored. Each dictionary item can contain the following + entries: + + bufnr buffer number; must be the number of a valid + buffer + filename name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not + present or it is invalid. + module name of a module; if given it will be used in + quickfix error window instead of the filename. + lnum line number in the file + end_lnum end of lines, if the item spans multiple lines + pattern search pattern used to locate the error + col column number + vcol when non-zero: "col" is visual column + when zero: "col" is byte index + end_col end column, if the item spans multiple columns + nr error number + text description of the error + type single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc. + valid recognized error message + + The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are + optional. Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to + locate a matching error line. + If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or + neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the + item will not be handled as an error line. + If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will + be used. + If the "valid" entry is not supplied, then the valid flag is + set when "bufnr" is a valid buffer or "filename" exists. + If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be + cleared. + Note that the list is not exactly the same as what + |getqflist()| returns. + + {action} values: *setqflist-action* *E927* + 'a' The items from {list} are added to the existing + quickfix list. If there is no existing list, then a + new list is created. + + 'r' The items from the current quickfix list are replaced + with the items from {list}. This can also be used to + clear the list: > + :call setqflist([], 'r') +< + 'f' All the quickfix lists in the quickfix stack are + freed. + + If {action} is not present or is set to ' ', then a new list + is created. The new quickfix list is added after the current + quickfix list in the stack and all the following lists are + freed. To add a new quickfix list at the end of the stack, + set "nr" in {what} to "$". + + The following items can be specified in dictionary {what}: + context quickfix list context. See |quickfix-context| + efm errorformat to use when parsing text from + "lines". If this is not present, then the + 'errorformat' option value is used. + See |quickfix-parse| + id quickfix list identifier |quickfix-ID| + idx index of the current entry in the quickfix + list specified by 'id' or 'nr'. If set to '$', + then the last entry in the list is set as the + current entry. See |quickfix-index| + items list of quickfix entries. Same as the {list} + argument. + lines use 'errorformat' to parse a list of lines and + add the resulting entries to the quickfix list + {nr} or {id}. Only a |List| value is supported. + See |quickfix-parse| + nr list number in the quickfix stack; zero + means the current quickfix list and "$" means + the last quickfix list. + quickfixtextfunc + function to get the text to display in the + quickfix window. The value can be the name of + a function or a funcref or a lambda. Refer to + |quickfix-window-function| for an explanation + of how to write the function and an example. + title quickfix list title text. See |quickfix-title| + Unsupported keys in {what} are ignored. + If the "nr" item is not present, then the current quickfix list + is modified. When creating a new quickfix list, "nr" can be + set to a value one greater than the quickfix stack size. + When modifying a quickfix list, to guarantee that the correct + list is modified, "id" should be used instead of "nr" to + specify the list. + + Examples (See also |setqflist-examples|): > + :call setqflist([], 'r', {'title': 'My search'}) + :call setqflist([], 'r', {'nr': 2, 'title': 'Errors'}) + :call setqflist([], 'a', {'id':qfid, 'lines':["F1:10:L10"]}) +< + Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. + + This function can be used to create a quickfix list + independent of the 'errorformat' setting. Use a command like + `:cc 1` to jump to the first position. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetErrorlist()->setqflist() +< + *setreg()* +setreg({regname}, {value} [, {options}]) + Set the register {regname} to {value}. + If {regname} is "" or "@", the unnamed register '"' is used. + The {regname} argument is a string. In |Vim9-script| + {regname} must be one character. + + {value} may be any value returned by |getreg()| or + |getreginfo()|, including a |List| or |Dict|. + If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case, + then the value is appended. + + {options} can also contain a register type specification: + "c" or "v" |characterwise| mode + "l" or "V" |linewise| mode + "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode + If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is + used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified + then the width of the block is set to the number of characters + in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character). + + If {options} contains no register settings, then the default + is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL> for + string {value} and linewise mode for list {value}. Blockwise + mode is never selected automatically. + Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. + + *E883* + Note: you may not use |List| containing more than one item to + set search and expression registers. Lists containing no + items act like empty strings. + + Examples: > + :call setreg(v:register, @*) + :call setreg('*', @%, 'ac') + :call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5') + :call setreg('"', { 'points_to': 'a'}) + +< This example shows using the functions to save and restore a + register: > + :let var_a = getreginfo() + :call setreg('a', var_a) +< or: > + :let var_a = getreg('a', 1, 1) + :let var_amode = getregtype('a') + .... + :call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode) +< Note: you may not reliably restore register value + without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it + newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are + represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|. + + You can also change the type of a register by appending + nothing: > + :call setreg('a', '', 'al') + +< Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetText()->setreg('a') + +settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabvar()* + Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}. + |t:var| + The {varname} argument is a string. + Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be + triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype'. + Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used. + Tabs are numbered starting with one. + This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + third argument: > + GetValue()->settabvar(tab, name) + +settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabwinvar()* + Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to + {val}. + Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage + use |setwinvar()|. + {winnr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. + Note that autocommands are blocked, side effects may not be + triggered, e.g. when setting 'filetype' or 'syntax'. + This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it + doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable. + For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged. + Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used. + Examples: > + :call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0) + :call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar") +< This function is not available in the |sandbox|. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + fourth argument: > + GetValue()->settabwinvar(tab, winnr, name) + +settagstack({nr}, {dict} [, {action}]) *settagstack()* + Modify the tag stack of the window {nr} using {dict}. + {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + + For a list of supported items in {dict}, refer to + |gettagstack()|. "curidx" takes effect before changing the tag + stack. + *E962* + How the tag stack is modified depends on the {action} + argument: + - If {action} is not present or is set to 'r', then the tag + stack is replaced. + - If {action} is set to 'a', then new entries from {dict} are + pushed (added) onto the tag stack. + - If {action} is set to 't', then all the entries from the + current entry in the tag stack or "curidx" in {dict} are + removed and then new entries are pushed to the stack. + + The current index is set to one after the length of the tag + stack after the modification. + + Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. + + Examples (for more examples see |tagstack-examples|): + Empty the tag stack of window 3: > + call settagstack(3, {'items' : []}) + +< Save and restore the tag stack: > + let stack = gettagstack(1003) + " do something else + call settagstack(1003, stack) + unlet stack +< + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetStack()->settagstack(winnr) + +setwinvar({winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()* + Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page. + Examples: > + :call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0) + :call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar") + +< Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + third argument: > + GetValue()->setwinvar(winnr, name) + +sha256({string}) *sha256()* + Returns a String with 64 hex characters, which is the SHA256 + checksum of {string}. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->sha256() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature} + +shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()* + Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument. + When the 'shell' contains powershell (MS-Windows) or pwsh + (MS-Windows, Linux, and macOS) then it will enclose {string} + in single quotes and will double up all internal single + quotes. + On MS-Windows, when 'shellslash' is not set, it will enclose + {string} in double quotes and double all double quotes within + {string}. + Otherwise it will enclose {string} in single quotes and + replace all "'" with "'\''". + + When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero + Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special + items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by + a backslash. This backslash will be removed again by the |:!| + command. + + The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg| + {special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail. That is + because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement + even when inside single quotes. + + With a |non-zero-arg| {special} the <NL> character is also + escaped. When 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's + escaped a second time. + + The "\" character will be escaped when 'shell' contains "fish" + in the tail. That is because for fish "\" is used as an escape + character inside single quotes. + + Example of use with a |:!| command: > + :exe '!dir ' .. shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1) +< This results in a directory listing for the file under the + cursor. Example of use with |system()|: > + :call system("chmod +w -- " .. shellescape(expand("%"))) +< See also |::S|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetCommand()->shellescape() + +shiftwidth([{col}]) *shiftwidth()* + Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the + 'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the + 'tabstop' value. This function was introduced with patch + 7.3.694 in 2012, everybody should have it by now (however it + did not allow for the optional {col} argument until 8.1.542). + + When there is one argument {col} this is used as column number + for which to return the 'shiftwidth' value. This matters for the + 'vartabstop' feature. If the 'vartabstop' setting is enabled and + no {col} argument is given, column 1 will be assumed. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetColumn()->shiftwidth() + +sign_ functions are documented here: |sign-functions-details| + + +simplify({filename}) *simplify()* + Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing + the meaning. Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on + Unix) are not resolved. If the first path component in + {filename} designates the current directory, this will be + valid for the result as well. A trailing path separator is + not removed either. On Unix "//path" is unchanged, but + "///path" is simplified to "/path" (this follows the Posix + standard). + Example: > + simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/" +< Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is + a searchable directory or does not exist. On Unix, it is also + removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same + directory. In order to resolve all the involved symbolic + links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetName()->simplify() + +sin({expr}) *sin()* + Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo sin(100) +< -0.506366 > + :echo sin(-4.01) +< 0.763301 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->sin() + + +sinh({expr}) *sinh()* + Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range + [-inf, inf]. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo sinh(0.5) +< 0.521095 > + :echo sinh(-0.9) +< -1.026517 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->sinh() + + +slice({expr}, {start} [, {end}]) *slice()* + Similar to using a |slice| "expr[start : end]", but "end" is + used exclusive. And for a string the indexes are used as + character indexes instead of byte indexes, like in + |vim9script|. Also, composing characters are not counted. + When {end} is omitted the slice continues to the last item. + When {end} is -1 the last item is omitted. + Returns an empty value if {start} or {end} are invalid. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetList()->slice(offset) + + +sort({list} [, {how} [, {dict}]]) *sort()* *E702* + Sort the items in {list} in-place. Returns {list}. + + If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: > + :let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist)) + +< When {how} is omitted or is a string, then sort() uses the + string representation of each item to sort on. Numbers sort + after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers. For sorting text in the + current buffer use |:sort|. + + When {how} is given and it is 'i' then case is ignored. + In legacy script, for backwards compatibility, the value one + can be used to ignore case. Zero means to not ignore case. + + When {how} is given and it is 'l' then the current collation + locale is used for ordering. Implementation details: strcoll() + is used to compare strings. See |:language| check or set the + collation locale. |v:collate| can also be used to check the + current locale. Sorting using the locale typically ignores + case. Example: > + " ö is sorted similarly to o with English locale. + :language collate en_US.UTF8 + :echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l') +< ['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'] ~ +> + " ö is sorted after z with Swedish locale. + :language collate sv_SE.UTF8 + :echo sort(['n', 'o', 'O', 'ö', 'p', 'z'], 'l') +< ['n', 'o', 'O', 'p', 'z', 'ö'] ~ + This does not work properly on Mac. + + When {how} is given and it is 'n' then all items will be + sorted numerical (Implementation detail: this uses the + strtod() function to parse numbers, Strings, Lists, Dicts and + Funcrefs will be considered as being 0). + + When {how} is given and it is 'N' then all items will be + sorted numerical. This is like 'n' but a string containing + digits will be used as the number they represent. + + When {how} is given and it is 'f' then all items will be + sorted numerical. All values must be a Number or a Float. + + When {how} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function + is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two + items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or + bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or + smaller if the first one sorts before the second one. + + {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be + used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| + + The sort is stable, items which compare equal (as number or as + string) will keep their relative position. E.g., when sorting + on numbers, text strings will sort next to each other, in the + same order as they were originally. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->sort() + +< Also see |uniq()|. + + Example: > + func MyCompare(i1, i2) + return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1 + endfunc + eval mylist->sort("MyCompare") +< A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which + ignores overflow: > + func MyCompare(i1, i2) + return a:i1 - a:i2 + endfunc +< For a simple expression you can use a lambda: > + eval mylist->sort({i1, i2 -> i1 - i2}) +< +sound_clear() *sound_clear()* + Stop playing all sounds. + + On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse + package, otherwise sound may not stop. + + {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} + + *sound_playevent()* +sound_playevent({name} [, {callback}]) + Play a sound identified by {name}. Which event names are + supported depends on the system. Often the XDG sound names + are used. On Ubuntu they may be found in + /usr/share/sounds/freedesktop/stereo. Example: > + call sound_playevent('bell') +< On MS-Windows, {name} can be SystemAsterisk, SystemDefault, + SystemExclamation, SystemExit, SystemHand, SystemQuestion, + SystemStart, SystemWelcome, etc. + On macOS, {name} refers to files located in + /System/Library/Sounds (e.g. "Tink"). It will also work for + custom installed sounds in folders like ~/Library/Sounds. + + When {callback} is specified it is invoked when the sound is + finished. The first argument is the sound ID, the second + argument is the status: + 0 sound was played to the end + 1 sound was interrupted + 2 error occurred after sound started + Example: > + func Callback(id, status) + echomsg "sound " .. a:id .. " finished with " .. a:status + endfunc + call sound_playevent('bell', 'Callback') + +< MS-Windows: {callback} doesn't work for this function. + + Returns the sound ID, which can be passed to `sound_stop()`. + Returns zero if the sound could not be played. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetSoundName()->sound_playevent() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} + + *sound_playfile()* +sound_playfile({path} [, {callback}]) + Like `sound_playevent()` but play sound file {path}. {path} + must be a full path. On Ubuntu you may find files to play + with this command: > + :!find /usr/share/sounds -type f | grep -v index.theme + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetSoundPath()->sound_playfile() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} + + +sound_stop({id}) *sound_stop()* + Stop playing sound {id}. {id} must be previously returned by + `sound_playevent()` or `sound_playfile()`. + + On some Linux systems you may need the libcanberra-pulse + package, otherwise sound may not stop. + + On MS-Windows, this does not work for event sound started by + `sound_playevent()`. To stop event sounds, use `sound_clear()`. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + soundid->sound_stop() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+sound| feature} + + *soundfold()* +soundfold({word}) + Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first + language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports + soundfolding. 'spell' must be set. When no sound folding is + possible the {word} is returned unmodified. + This can be used for making spelling suggestions. Note that + the method can be quite slow. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWord()->soundfold() +< + *spellbadword()* +spellbadword([{sentence}]) + Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under + or after the cursor. The cursor is moved to the start of the + bad word. When no bad word is found in the cursor line the + result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move. + + With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that + is badly spelled. If there are no spelling mistakes the + result is an empty string. + + The return value is a list with two items: + - The badly spelled word or an empty string. + - The type of the spelling error: + "bad" spelling mistake + "rare" rare word + "local" word only valid in another region + "caps" word should start with Capital + Example: > + echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox") +< ['quik', 'bad'] ~ + + The spelling information for the current window and the value + of 'spelllang' are used. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->spellbadword() +< + *spellsuggest()* +spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) + Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}. + When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are + returned. Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned. + + When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only + suggestions with a leading capital will be given. Use this + after a match with 'spellcapcheck'. + + {word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text. + This allows for joining two words that were split. The + suggestions also include the following text, thus you can + replace a line. + + {word} may also be a good word. Similar words will then be + returned. {word} itself is not included in the suggestions, + although it may appear capitalized. + + The spelling information for the current window is used. The + values of 'spelllang' and 'spellsuggest' are used. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWord()->spellsuggest() + +split({string} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]]) *split()* + Make a |List| out of {string}. When {pattern} is omitted or + empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an + item. + Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches, + removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used + here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c| + When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the + {keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero. + Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one + character or when {keepempty} is non-zero. + Example: > + :let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+') +< To split a string in individual characters: > + :for c in split(mystring, '\zs') +< If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs' at + the end of the pattern: > + :echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs') +< ['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~ + Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: > + :let items = split(line, ':', 1) +< The opposite function is |join()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetString()->split() + +sqrt({expr}) *sqrt()* + Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a + |Float|. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. When {expr} + is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number). Returns 0.0 if + {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo sqrt(100) +< 10.0 > + :echo sqrt(-4.01) +< nan + "nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->sqrt() + + +srand([{expr}]) *srand()* + Initialize seed used by |rand()|: + - If {expr} is not given, seed values are initialized by + reading from /dev/urandom, if possible, or using time(NULL) + a.k.a. epoch time otherwise; this only has second accuracy. + - If {expr} is given it must be a Number. It is used to + initialize the seed values. This is useful for testing or + when a predictable sequence is intended. + + Examples: > + :let seed = srand() + :let seed = srand(userinput) + :echo rand(seed) + +state([{what}]) *state()* + Return a string which contains characters indicating the + current state. Mostly useful in callbacks that want to do + work that may not always be safe. Roughly this works like: + - callback uses state() to check if work is safe to do. + Yes: then do it right away. + No: add to work queue and add a |SafeState| and/or + |SafeStateAgain| autocommand (|SafeState| triggers at + toplevel, |SafeStateAgain| triggers after handling + messages and callbacks). + - When SafeState or SafeStateAgain is triggered and executes + your autocommand, check with `state()` if the work can be + done now, and if yes remove it from the queue and execute. + Remove the autocommand if the queue is now empty. + Also see |mode()|. + + When {what} is given only characters in this string will be + added. E.g, this checks if the screen has scrolled: > + if state('s') == '' + " screen has not scrolled +< + These characters indicate the state, generally indicating that + something is busy: + m halfway a mapping, :normal command, feedkeys() or + stuffed command + o operator pending, e.g. after |d| + a Insert mode autocomplete active + x executing an autocommand + w blocked on waiting, e.g. ch_evalexpr(), ch_read() and + ch_readraw() when reading json + S not triggering SafeState or SafeStateAgain, e.g. after + |f| or a count + c callback invoked, including timer (repeats for + recursiveness up to "ccc") + s screen has scrolled for messages + +str2float({string} [, {quoted}]) *str2float()* + Convert String {string} to a Float. This mostly works the + same as when using a floating point number in an expression, + see |floating-point-format|. But it's a bit more permissive. + E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to + write "1.0e40". The hexadecimal form "0x123" is also + accepted, but not others, like binary or octal. + When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single + quotes before the dot are ignored, thus "1'000.0" is a + thousand. + Text after the number is silently ignored. + The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is + set to. A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to + 12.0. You can strip out thousands separators with + |substitute()|: > + let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g')) +< + Returns 0.0 if the conversion fails. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + let f = text->substitute(',', '', 'g')->str2float() + +str2list({string} [, {utf8}]) *str2list()* + Return a list containing the number values which represent + each character in String {string}. Examples: > + str2list(" ") returns [32] + str2list("ABC") returns [65, 66, 67] +< |list2str()| does the opposite. + + When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. + When {utf8} is TRUE, always treat the String as UTF-8 + characters. With UTF-8 composing characters are handled + properly: > + str2list("á") returns [97, 769] + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetString()->str2list() + + +str2nr({string} [, {base} [, {quoted}]]) *str2nr()* + Convert string {string} to a number. + {base} is the conversion base, it can be 2, 8, 10 or 16. + When {quoted} is present and non-zero then embedded single + quotes are ignored, thus "1'000'000" is a million. + + When {base} is omitted base 10 is used. This also means that + a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as + with the default String to Number conversion. Example: > + let nr = str2nr('0123') +< + When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored. With a + different base the result will be zero. Similarly, when + {base} is 8 a leading "0", "0o" or "0O" is ignored, and when + {base} is 2 a leading "0b" or "0B" is ignored. + Text after the number is silently ignored. + + Returns 0 if {string} is empty or on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->str2nr() + + +strcharlen({string}) *strcharlen()* + The result is a Number, which is the number of characters + in String {string}. Composing characters are ignored. + |strchars()| can count the number of characters, counting + composing characters separately. + + Returns 0 if {string} is empty or on error. + + Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->strcharlen() + + +strcharpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {skipcc}]]) *strcharpart()* + Like |strpart()| but using character index and length instead + of byte index and length. + When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are + counted separately. + When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored, + similar to |slice()|. + When a character index is used where a character does not + exist it is omitted and counted as one character. For + example: > + strcharpart('abc', -1, 2) +< results in 'a'. + + Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->strcharpart(5) + + +strchars({string} [, {skipcc}]) *strchars()* + The result is a Number, which is the number of characters + in String {string}. + When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are + counted separately. + When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored. + |strcharlen()| always does this. + + Returns zero on error. + + Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. + + {skipcc} is only available after 7.4.755. For backward + compatibility, you can define a wrapper function: > + if has("patch-7.4.755") + function s:strchars(str, skipcc) + return strchars(a:str, a:skipcc) + endfunction + else + function s:strchars(str, skipcc) + if a:skipcc + return strlen(substitute(a:str, ".", "x", "g")) + else + return strchars(a:str) + endif + endfunction + endif +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->strchars() + +strdisplaywidth({string} [, {col}]) *strdisplaywidth()* + The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells + String {string} occupies on the screen when it starts at {col} + (first column is zero). When {col} is omitted zero is used. + Otherwise it is the screen column where to start. This + matters for Tab characters. + The option settings of the current window are used. This + matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as + 'tabstop' and 'display'. + When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class + Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. + Returns zero on error. + Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->strdisplaywidth() + +strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()* + The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as + specified by the {format} string. The given {time} is used, + or the current time if no time is given. The accepted + {format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable! + See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the + format. The maximum length of the result is 80 characters. + See also |localtime()|, |getftime()| and |strptime()|. + The language can be changed with the |:language| command. + Examples: > + :echo strftime("%c") Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997 + :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X") 1997 Apr 27 11:53:25 + :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T") 970427 11:53:55 + :echo strftime("%H:%M") 11:55 + :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c")) + Show mod time of file.c. +< Not available on all systems. To check use: > + :if exists("*strftime") + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFormat()->strftime() + +strgetchar({str}, {index}) *strgetchar()* + Get a Number corresponding to the character at {index} in + {str}. This uses a zero-based character index, not a byte + index. Composing characters are considered separate + characters here. Use |nr2char()| to convert the Number to a + String. + Returns -1 if {index} is invalid. + Also see |strcharpart()| and |strchars()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->strgetchar(5) + +stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *stridx()* + The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in + {haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}. + If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}. + This can be used to find a second match: > + :let colon1 = stridx(line, ":") + :let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1) +< The search is done case-sensitive. + For pattern searches use |match()|. + -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. + See also |strridx()|. + Examples: > + :echo stridx("An Example", "Example") 3 + :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start") 0 + :echo stridx("Starting point", "start") -1 +< *strstr()* *strchr()* + stridx() works similar to the C function strstr(). When used + with a single character it works similar to strchr(). + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetHaystack()->stridx(needle) +< + *string()* +string({expr}) Return {expr} converted to a String. If {expr} is a Number, + Float, String, Blob or a composition of them, then the result + can be parsed back with |eval()|. + {expr} type result ~ + String 'string' (single quotes are doubled) + Number 123 + Float 123.123456 or 1.123456e8 + Funcref function('name') + Blob 0z00112233.44556677.8899 + List [item, item] + Dictionary {key: value, key: value} + Class class SomeName + Object object of SomeName {lnum: 1, col: 3} + + When a |List| or |Dictionary| has a recursive reference it is + replaced by "[...]" or "{...}". Using eval() on the result + will then fail. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->string() + +< Also see |strtrans()|. + + +strlen({string}) *strlen()* + The result is a Number, which is the length of the String + {string} in bytes. + If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String. + For other types an error is given and zero is returned. + If you want to count the number of multibyte characters use + |strchars()|. + Also see |len()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetString()->strlen() + +strpart({src}, {start} [, {len} [, {chars}]]) *strpart()* + The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from + byte {start}, with the byte length {len}. + When {chars} is present and TRUE then {len} is the number of + characters positions (composing characters are not counted + separately, thus "1" means one base character and any + following composing characters). + To count {start} as characters instead of bytes use + |strcharpart()|. + + When bytes are selected which do not exist, this doesn't + result in an error, the bytes are simply omitted. + If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the + end of the {src}. > + strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2) == "de" + strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4) == "ab" + strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4) == "fg" + strpart("abcdefg", 3) == "defg" + +< Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0. For + example, to get the character under the cursor: > + strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 1, v:true) +< + Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->strpart(5) + +strptime({format}, {timestring}) *strptime()* + The result is a Number, which is a unix timestamp representing + the date and time in {timestring}, which is expected to match + the format specified in {format}. + + The accepted {format} depends on your system, thus this is not + portable! See the manual page of the C function strptime() + for the format. Especially avoid "%c". The value of $TZ also + matters. + + If the {timestring} cannot be parsed with {format} zero is + returned. If you do not know the format of {timestring} you + can try different {format} values until you get a non-zero + result. + + See also |strftime()|. + Examples: > + :echo strptime("%Y %b %d %X", "1997 Apr 27 11:49:23") +< 862156163 > + :echo strftime("%c", strptime("%y%m%d %T", "970427 11:53:55")) +< Sun Apr 27 11:53:55 1997 > + :echo strftime("%c", strptime("%Y%m%d%H%M%S", "19970427115355") + 3600) +< Sun Apr 27 12:53:55 1997 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFormat()->strptime(timestring) +< + Not available on all systems. To check use: > + :if exists("*strptime") + +strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()* + The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in + {haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}. + When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are + ignored. This can be used to find a match before a previous + match: > + :let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",") + :let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1) +< The search is done case-sensitive. + For pattern searches use |match()|. + -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. + If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned. + See also |stridx()|. Examples: > + :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3 +< *strrchr()* + When used with a single character it works similar to the C + function strrchr(). + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetHaystack()->strridx(needle) + +strtrans({string}) *strtrans()* + The result is a String, which is {string} with all unprintable + characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|. + Like they are shown in a window. Example: > + echo strtrans(@a) +< This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of + starting a new line. + + Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetString()->strtrans() + +strwidth({string}) *strwidth()* + The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells + String {string} occupies. A Tab character is counted as one + cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|. + When {string} contains characters with East Asian Width Class + Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. + Returns zero on error. + Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetString()->strwidth() + +submatch({nr} [, {list}]) *submatch()* *E935* + Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or + substitute() function. + Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text. When {nr} + is 0 the whole matched text is returned. + Note that a NL in the string can stand for a line break of a + multi-line match or a NUL character in the text. + Also see |sub-replace-expression|. + + If {list} is present and non-zero then submatch() returns + a list of strings, similar to |getline()| with two arguments. + NL characters in the text represent NUL characters in the + text. + Only returns more than one item for |:substitute|, inside + |substitute()| this list will always contain one or zero + items, since there are no real line breaks. + + When substitute() is used recursively only the submatches in + the current (deepest) call can be obtained. + + Returns an empty string or list on error. + + Examples: > + :s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/ + :echo substitute(text, '\d\+', '\=submatch(0) + 1', '') +< This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it. + A line break is included as a newline character. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetNr()->submatch() + +substitute({string}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) *substitute()* + The result is a String, which is a copy of {string}, in which + the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}. + When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {string} are + replaced. Otherwise {flags} should be "". + + This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags). + But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic' + option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts + portable). 'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C| + if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'. + 'smartcase' is not used. See |string-match| for how {pat} is + used. + + A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}. + Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning + |sub-replace-special|. For example, to replace something with + "\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'. + + When {pat} does not match in {string}, {string} is returned + unmodified. + + Example: > + :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "") +< This removes the last component of the 'path' option. > + :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "") +< results in "TESTING". + + When {sub} starts with "\=", the remainder is interpreted as + an expression. See |sub-replace-expression|. Example: > + :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', + \ '\=nr2char("0x" .. submatch(1))', 'g') + +< When {sub} is a Funcref that function is called, with one + optional argument. Example: > + :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', SubNr, 'g') +< The optional argument is a list which contains the whole + matched string and up to nine submatches, like what + |submatch()| returns. Example: > + :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', {m -> '0x' .. m[1]}, 'g') + +< Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetString()->substitute(pat, sub, flags) + +swapfilelist() *swapfilelist()* + Returns a list of swap file names, like what "vim -r" shows. + See the |-r| command argument. The 'directory' option is used + for the directories to inspect. If you only want to get a + list of swap files in the current directory then temporarily + set 'directory' to a dot: > + let save_dir = &directory + let &directory = '.' + let swapfiles = swapfilelist() + let &directory = save_dir + +swapinfo({fname}) *swapinfo()* + The result is a dictionary, which holds information about the + swapfile {fname}. The available fields are: + version Vim version + user user name + host host name + fname original file name + pid PID of the Vim process that created the swap + file + mtime last modification time in seconds + inode Optional: INODE number of the file + dirty 1 if file was modified, 0 if not + Note that "user" and "host" are truncated to at most 39 bytes. + In case of failure an "error" item is added with the reason: + Cannot open file: file not found or in accessible + Cannot read file: cannot read first block + Not a swap file: does not contain correct block ID + Magic number mismatch: Info in first block is invalid + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFilename()->swapinfo() + +swapname({buf}) *swapname()* + The result is the swap file path of the buffer {expr}. + For the use of {buf}, see |bufname()| above. + If buffer {buf} is the current buffer, the result is equal to + |:swapname| (unless there is no swap file). + If buffer {buf} has no swap file, returns an empty string. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBufname()->swapname() + +synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) *synID()* + The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position + {lnum} and {col} in the current window. + The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and + |synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text. + + {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first + line. 'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned. + Note that when the position is after the last character, + that's where the cursor can be in Insert mode, synID() returns + zero. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. + + When {trans} is |TRUE|, transparent items are reduced to the + item that they reveal. This is useful when wanting to know + the effective color. When {trans} is |FALSE|, the transparent + item is returned. This is useful when wanting to know which + syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens). + Warning: This function can be very slow. Best speed is + obtained by going through the file in forward direction. + + Returns zero on error. + + Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): > + :echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name") +< + +synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) *synIDattr()* + The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of + syntax ID {synID}. This can be used to obtain information + about a syntax item. + {mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes + for that mode. When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is + used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are + used (GUI, cterm or term). + Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups. + {what} result + "name" the name of the syntax item + "fg" foreground color (GUI: color name used to set + the color, cterm: color number as a string, + term: empty string) + "bg" background color (as with "fg") + "font" font name (only available in the GUI) + |highlight-font| + "sp" special color for the GUI (as with "fg") + |highlight-guisp| + "ul" underline color for cterm: number as a string + "fg#" like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is + running the name in "#RRGGBB" form + "bg#" like "fg#" for "bg" + "sp#" like "fg#" for "sp" + "bold" "1" if bold + "italic" "1" if italic + "reverse" "1" if reverse + "inverse" "1" if inverse (= reverse) + "standout" "1" if standout + "underline" "1" if underlined + "undercurl" "1" if undercurled + "strike" "1" if strikethrough + "nocombine" "1" if nocombine + + Returns an empty string on error. + + Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the + cursor): > + :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg") +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + :echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg") + + +synIDtrans({synID}) *synIDtrans()* + The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of + {synID}. This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to + highlight the character. Highlight links given with + ":highlight link" are followed. + + Returns zero on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + :echo synID(line("."), col("."), 1)->synIDtrans()->synIDattr("fg") + +synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) *synconcealed()* + The result is a |List| with currently three items: + 1. The first item in the list is 0 if the character at the + position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a concealable + region, 1 if it is. {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. + 2. The second item in the list is a string. If the first item + is 1, the second item contains the text which will be + displayed in place of the concealed text, depending on the + current setting of 'conceallevel' and 'listchars'. + 3. The third and final item in the list is a number + representing the specific syntax region matched in the + line. When the character is not concealed the value is + zero. This allows detection of the beginning of a new + concealable region if there are two consecutive regions + with the same replacement character. For an example, if + the text is "123456" and both "23" and "45" are concealed + and replaced by the character "X", then: + call returns ~ + synconcealed(lnum, 1) [0, '', 0] + synconcealed(lnum, 2) [1, 'X', 1] + synconcealed(lnum, 3) [1, 'X', 1] + synconcealed(lnum, 4) [1, 'X', 2] + synconcealed(lnum, 5) [1, 'X', 2] + synconcealed(lnum, 6) [0, '', 0] + + +synstack({lnum}, {col}) *synstack()* + Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the + position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. {lnum} is + used like with |getline()|. Each item in the List is an ID + like what |synID()| returns. + The first item in the List is the outer region, following are + items contained in that one. The last one is what |synID()| + returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a + transparent item. + This function is useful for debugging a syntax file. + Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: > + for id in synstack(line("."), col(".")) + echo synIDattr(id, "name") + endfor +< When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid + an empty List is returned. The position just after the last + character in a line and the first column in an empty line are + valid positions. + +system({expr} [, {input}]) *system()* *E677* + Get the output of the shell command {expr} as a |String|. See + |systemlist()| to get the output as a |List|. + + When {input} is given and is a |String| this string is written + to a file and passed as stdin to the command. The string is + written as-is, you need to take care of using the correct line + separators yourself. + If {input} is given and is a |List| it is written to the file + in a way |writefile()| does with {binary} set to "b" (i.e. + with a newline between each list item with newlines inside + list items converted to NULs). + When {input} is given and is a number that is a valid id for + an existing buffer then the content of the buffer is written + to the file line by line, each line terminated by a NL and + NULs characters where the text has a NL. + + Pipes are not used, the 'shelltemp' option is not used. + + When prepended by |:silent| the terminal will not be set to + cooked mode. This is meant to be used for commands that do + not need the user to type. It avoids stray characters showing + up on the screen which require |CTRL-L| to remove. > + :silent let f = system('ls *.vim') +< + Note: Use |shellescape()| or |::S| with |expand()| or + |fnamemodify()| to escape special characters in a command + argument. Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to fail. + The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may also + cause trouble. + This is not to be used for interactive commands. + + The result is a String. Example: > + :let files = system('ls ' .. shellescape(expand('%:h'))) + :let files = system('ls ' .. expand('%:h:S')) + +< To make the result more system-independent, the shell output + is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and + <CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems. + To avoid the string being truncated at a NUL, all NUL + characters are replaced with SOH (0x01). + + The command executed is constructed using several options: + 'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote' + ({tmp} is an automatically generated file name). + For Unix, braces are put around {expr} to allow for + concatenated commands. + + The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a + CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least). + + The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|. + This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. + + Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may + make the function fail. It has also been reported to fail + when using a security agent application. + Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files. + Use |:checktime| to force a check. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + :echo GetCmd()->system() + + +systemlist({expr} [, {input}]) *systemlist()* + Same as |system()|, but returns a |List| with lines (parts of + output separated by NL) with NULs transformed into NLs. Output + is the same as |readfile()| will output with {binary} argument + set to "b", except that there is no extra empty item when the + result ends in a NL. + Note that on MS-Windows you may get trailing CR characters. + + To see the difference between "echo hello" and "echo -n hello" + use |system()| and |split()|: > + echo system('echo hello')->split('\n', 1) +< + Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + :echo GetCmd()->systemlist() + + +tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) *tabpagebuflist()* + The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the + buffer associated with each window in the current tab page. + {arg} specifies the number of the tab page to be used. When + omitted the current tab page is used. + When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned. + To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: > + let buflist = [] + for i in range(tabpagenr('$')) + call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1)) + endfor +< Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTabpage()->tabpagebuflist() + +tabpagenr([{arg}]) *tabpagenr()* + The result is a Number, which is the number of the current + tab page. The first tab page has number 1. + + The optional argument {arg} supports the following values: + $ the number of the last tab page (the tab page + count). + # the number of the last accessed tab page + (where |g<Tab>| goes to). if there is no + previous tab page 0 is returned. + The number can be used with the |:tab| command. + + Returns zero on error. + + +tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}]) *tabpagewinnr()* + Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}. + {tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. + {arg} is used like with |winnr()|: + - When omitted the current window number is returned. This is + the window which will be used when going to this tab page. + - When "$" the number of windows is returned. + - When "#" the previous window nr is returned. + Useful examples: > + tabpagewinnr(1) " current window of tab page 1 + tabpagewinnr(4, '$') " number of windows in tab page 4 +< When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTabpage()->tabpagewinnr() +< + *tagfiles()* +tagfiles() Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags + for the current buffer. This is the 'tags' option expanded. + + +taglist({expr} [, {filename}]) *taglist()* + Returns a |List| of tags matching the regular expression {expr}. + + If {filename} is passed it is used to prioritize the results + in the same way that |:tselect| does. See |tag-priority|. + {filename} should be the full path of the file. + + Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following + entries: + name Name of the tag. + filename Name of the file where the tag is + defined. It is either relative to the + current directory or a full path. + cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in + the file. + kind Type of the tag. The value for this + entry depends on the language specific + kind values. Only available when + using a tags file generated by + Universal/Exuberant ctags or hdrtag. + static A file specific tag. Refer to + |static-tag| for more information. + More entries may be present, depending on the content of the + tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature. + Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these + fields. For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum" + may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is + contained in. + + The ex-command "cmd" can be either an ex search pattern, a + line number or a line number followed by a byte number. + + If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned. + + To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be + used in {expr}. This also make the function work faster. + Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information about the tag + search regular expression pattern. + + Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is + located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of + the tags file generated by the different ctags tools. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTagpattern()->taglist() + +tan({expr}) *tan()* + Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float| + in the range [-inf, inf]. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo tan(10) +< 0.648361 > + :echo tan(-4.01) +< -1.181502 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->tan() + + +tanh({expr}) *tanh()* + Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the + range [-1, 1]. + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + :echo tanh(0.5) +< 0.462117 > + :echo tanh(-1) +< -0.761594 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->tanh() + + +tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name* + The result is a String, which is the name of a file that + doesn't exist. It can be used for a temporary file. The name + is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: > + :let tmpfile = tempname() + :exe "redir > " .. tmpfile +< For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|. + For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash' + option is set, or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-' and + 'shell' does not contain powershell or pwsh. + + +term_ functions are documented here: |terminal-function-details| + + +terminalprops() *terminalprops()* + Returns a |Dictionary| with properties of the terminal that Vim + detected from the response to |t_RV| request. See + |v:termresponse| for the response itself. If |v:termresponse| + is empty most values here will be 'u' for unknown. + cursor_style whether sending |t_RS| works ** + cursor_blink_mode whether sending |t_RC| works ** + underline_rgb whether |t_8u| works ** + mouse mouse type supported + kitty whether Kitty terminal was detected + + ** value 'u' for unknown, 'y' for yes, 'n' for no + + If the |+termresponse| feature is missing then the result is + an empty dictionary. + + If "cursor_style" is 'y' then |t_RS| will be sent to request the + current cursor style. + If "cursor_blink_mode" is 'y' then |t_RC| will be sent to + request the cursor blink status. + "cursor_style" and "cursor_blink_mode" are also set if |t_u7| + is not empty, Vim will detect the working of sending |t_RS| + and |t_RC| on startup. + + When "underline_rgb" is not 'y', then |t_8u| will be made empty. + This avoids sending it to xterm, which would clear the colors. + + For "mouse" the value 'u' is unknown + + Also see: + - 'ambiwidth' - detected by using |t_u7|. + - |v:termstyleresp| and |v:termblinkresp| for the response to + |t_RS| and |t_RC|. + + +test_ functions are documented here: |test-functions-details| + + + *timer_info()* +timer_info([{id}]) + Return a list with information about timers. + When {id} is given only information about this timer is + returned. When timer {id} does not exist an empty list is + returned. + When {id} is omitted information about all timers is returned. + + For each timer the information is stored in a |Dictionary| with + these items: + "id" the timer ID + "time" time the timer was started with + "remaining" time until the timer fires + "repeat" number of times the timer will still fire; + -1 means forever + "callback" the callback + "paused" 1 if the timer is paused, 0 otherwise + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTimer()->timer_info() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} + +timer_pause({timer}, {paused}) *timer_pause()* + Pause or unpause a timer. A paused timer does not invoke its + callback when its time expires. Unpausing a timer may cause + the callback to be invoked almost immediately if enough time + has passed. + + Pausing a timer is useful to avoid the callback to be called + for a short time. + + If {paused} evaluates to a non-zero Number or a non-empty + String, then the timer is paused, otherwise it is unpaused. + See |non-zero-arg|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTimer()->timer_pause(1) + +< {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} + + *timer_start()* *timer* *timers* +timer_start({time}, {callback} [, {options}]) + Create a timer and return the timer ID. + + {time} is the waiting time in milliseconds. This is the + minimum time before invoking the callback. When the system is + busy or Vim is not waiting for input the time will be longer. + Zero can be used to execute the callback when Vim is back in + the main loop. + + {callback} is the function to call. It can be the name of a + function or a |Funcref|. It is called with one argument, which + is the timer ID. The callback is only invoked when Vim is + waiting for input. + If you want to show a message look at |popup_notification()| + to avoid interfering with what the user is doing. + + {options} is a dictionary. Supported entries: + "repeat" Number of times to repeat calling the + callback. -1 means forever. When not present + the callback will be called once. + If the timer causes an error three times in a + row the repeat is cancelled. This avoids that + Vim becomes unusable because of all the error + messages. + + Returns -1 on error. + + Example: > + func MyHandler(timer) + echo 'Handler called' + endfunc + let timer = timer_start(500, 'MyHandler', + \ {'repeat': 3}) +< This will invoke MyHandler() three times at 500 msec + intervals. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetMsec()->timer_start(callback) + +< Not available in the |sandbox|. + {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} + +timer_stop({timer}) *timer_stop()* + Stop a timer. The timer callback will no longer be invoked. + {timer} is an ID returned by timer_start(), thus it must be a + Number. If {timer} does not exist there is no error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTimer()->timer_stop() + +< {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} + +timer_stopall() *timer_stopall()* + Stop all timers. The timer callbacks will no longer be + invoked. Useful if a timer is misbehaving. If there are no + timers there is no error. + + {only available when compiled with the |+timers| feature} + +tolower({expr}) *tolower()* + The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase + characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to + the string). Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->tolower() + +toupper({expr}) *toupper()* + The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase + characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to + the string). Returns an empty string on error. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->toupper() + +tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) *tr()* + The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters + which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that + position in the {tostr} string. Thus the first character in + {fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr} + and so on. Exactly like the unix "tr" command. + This code also deals with multibyte characters properly. + + Returns an empty string on error. + + Examples: > + echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT") +< returns "Hello THere" > + echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}") +< returns "{blob}" + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->tr(from, to) + +trim({text} [, {mask} [, {dir}]]) *trim()* + Return {text} as a String where any character in {mask} is + removed from the beginning and/or end of {text}. + + If {mask} is not given, {mask} is all characters up to 0x20, + which includes Tab, space, NL and CR, plus the non-breaking + space character 0xa0. + + The optional {dir} argument specifies where to remove the + characters: + 0 remove from the beginning and end of {text} + 1 remove only at the beginning of {text} + 2 remove only at the end of {text} + When omitted both ends are trimmed. + + This function deals with multibyte characters properly. + Returns an empty string on error. + + Examples: > + echo trim(" some text ") +< returns "some text" > + echo trim(" \r\t\t\r RESERVE \t\n\x0B\xA0") .. "_TAIL" +< returns "RESERVE_TAIL" > + echo trim("rm<Xrm<>X>rrm", "rm<>") +< returns "Xrm<>X" (characters in the middle are not removed) > + echo trim(" vim ", " ", 2) +< returns " vim" + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->trim() + +trunc({expr}) *trunc()* + Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or + equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero). + {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. + Returns 0.0 if {expr} is not a |Float| or a |Number|. + Examples: > + echo trunc(1.456) +< 1.0 > + echo trunc(-5.456) +< -5.0 > + echo trunc(4.0) +< 4.0 + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + Compute()->trunc() +< + *type()* +type({expr}) The result is a Number representing the type of {expr}. + Instead of using the number directly, it is better to use the + v:t_ variable that has the value: + Number: 0 |v:t_number| + String: 1 |v:t_string| + Funcref: 2 |v:t_func| + List: 3 |v:t_list| + Dictionary: 4 |v:t_dict| + Float: 5 |v:t_float| + Boolean: 6 |v:t_bool| (v:false and v:true) + None: 7 |v:t_none| (v:null and v:none) + Job: 8 |v:t_job| + Channel: 9 |v:t_channel| + Blob: 10 |v:t_blob| + Class 12 |v:t_class| + Object 13 |v:t_object| + For backward compatibility, this method can be used: > + :if type(myvar) == type(0) + :if type(myvar) == type("") + :if type(myvar) == type(function("tr")) + :if type(myvar) == type([]) + :if type(myvar) == type({}) + :if type(myvar) == type(0.0) + :if type(myvar) == type(v:false) + :if type(myvar) == type(v:none) +< To check if the v:t_ variables exist use this: > + :if exists('v:t_number') + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->type() + + +typename({expr}) *typename()* + Return a string representation of the type of {expr}. + Example: > + echo typename([1, 2, 3]) +< list<number> ~ + + +undofile({name}) *undofile()* + Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file + with name {name} when writing. This uses the 'undodir' + option, finding directories that exist. It does not check if + the undo file exists. + {name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what + is used internally. + If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a + buffer without a file name will not write an undo file. + Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|. + When compiled without the |+persistent_undo| option this always + returns an empty string. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetFilename()->undofile() + +undotree() *undotree()* + Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with + the following items: + "seq_last" The highest undo sequence number used. + "seq_cur" The sequence number of the current position in + the undo tree. This differs from "seq_last" + when some changes were undone. + "time_cur" Time last used for |:earlier| and related + commands. Use |strftime()| to convert to + something readable. + "save_last" Number of the last file write. Zero when no + write yet. + "save_cur" Number of the current position in the undo + tree. + "synced" Non-zero when the last undo block was synced. + This happens when waiting from input from the + user. See |undo-blocks|. + "entries" A list of dictionaries with information about + undo blocks. + + The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item. + Each List item is a |Dictionary| with these items: + "seq" Undo sequence number. Same as what appears in + |:undolist|. + "time" Timestamp when the change happened. Use + |strftime()| to convert to something readable. + "newhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one + that was added. This marks the last change + and where further changes will be added. + "curhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one + that was undone. This marks the current + position in the undo tree, the block that will + be used by a redo command. When nothing was + undone after the last change this item will + not appear anywhere. + "save" Only appears on the last block before a file + write. The number is the write count. The + first write has number 1, the last one the + "save_last" mentioned above. + "alt" Alternate entry. This is again a List of undo + blocks. Each item may again have an "alt" + item. + +uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) *uniq()* *E882* + Remove second and succeeding copies of repeated adjacent + {list} items in-place. Returns {list}. If you want a list + to remain unmodified make a copy first: > + :let newlist = uniq(copy(mylist)) +< The default compare function uses the string representation of + each item. For the use of {func} and {dict} see |sort()|. + + Returns zero if {list} is not a |List|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mylist->uniq() + +values({dict}) *values()* + Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}. The |List| is + in arbitrary order. Also see |items()| and |keys()|. + Returns zero if {dict} is not a |Dict|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + mydict->values() + +virtcol({expr} [, {list}]) *virtcol()* + The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file + position given with {expr}. That is, the last screen position + occupied by the character at that position, when the screen + would be of unlimited width. When there is a <Tab> at the + position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of + the <Tab>. For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts' + set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored. + For the byte position use |col()|. + + For the use of {expr} see |col()|. + + When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], + where "off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of + the character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the + last character. When "off" is omitted zero is used. When + Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position + beyond the end of the line can be returned. Also see + |'virtualedit'| + + The accepted positions are: + . the cursor position + $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the + number of displayed characters in the cursor line + plus one) + 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is + returned) + v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the + cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode + returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in + that it's updated right away. + + If {list} is present and non-zero then virtcol() returns a List + with the first and last screen position occupied by the + character. + + Note that only marks in the current file can be used. + Examples: > + " With text "foo^Lbar" and cursor on the "^L": + + virtcol(".") " returns 5 + virtcol(".", 1) " returns [4, 5] + virtcol("$") " returns 9 + + " With text " there", with 't at 'h': + + virtcol("'t") " returns 6 +< The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error. + A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of + all lines: > + echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])")) + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetPos()->virtcol() + +virtcol2col({winid}, {lnum}, {col}) *virtcol2col()* + The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the + character in window {winid} at buffer line {lnum} and virtual + column {col}. + + If {col} is greater than the last virtual column in line + {lnum}, then the byte index of the character at the last + virtual column is returned. + + The {winid} argument can be the window number or the + |window-ID|. If this is zero, then the current window is used. + + Returns -1 if the window {winid} doesn't exist or the buffer + line {lnum} or virtual column {col} is invalid. + + See also |screenpos()|, |virtcol()| and |col()|. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->virtcol2col(lnum, col) + +visualmode([{expr}]) *visualmode()* + The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode + used in the current buffer. Initially it returns an empty + string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v", + "V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for + character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode + respectively. + Example: > + :exe "normal " .. visualmode() +< This enters the same Visual mode as before. It is also useful + in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the + Visual mode that was used. + If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode + (e.g., in a |:vmap|). + If {expr} is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or + a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and + the old value is returned. See |non-zero-arg|. + +wildmenumode() *wildmenumode()* + Returns |TRUE| when the wildmenu is active and |FALSE| + otherwise. See 'wildmenu' and 'wildmode'. + This can be used in mappings to handle the 'wildcharm' option + gracefully. (Makes only sense with |mapmode-c| mappings). + + For example to make <c-j> work like <down> in wildmode, use: > + :cnoremap <expr> <C-j> wildmenumode() ? "\<Down>\<Tab>" : "\<c-j>" +< + (Note, this needs the 'wildcharm' option set appropriately). + +win_execute({id}, {command} [, {silent}]) *win_execute()* + Like `execute()` but in the context of window {id}. + The window will temporarily be made the current window, + without triggering autocommands or changing directory. When + executing {command} autocommands will be triggered, this may + have unexpected side effects. Use |:noautocmd| if needed. + Example: > + call win_execute(winid, 'set syntax=python') +< Doing the same with `setwinvar()` would not trigger + autocommands and not actually show syntax highlighting. + *E994* + Not all commands are allowed in popup windows. + When window {id} does not exist then no error is given and + an empty string is returned. + + Can also be used as a |method|, the base is passed as the + second argument: > + GetCommand()->win_execute(winid) + +win_findbuf({bufnr}) *win_findbuf()* + Returns a |List| with |window-ID|s for windows that contain + buffer {bufnr}. When there is none the list is empty. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetBufnr()->win_findbuf() + +win_getid([{win} [, {tab}]]) *win_getid()* + Get the |window-ID| for the specified window. + When {win} is missing use the current window. + With {win} this is the window number. The top window has + number 1. + Without {tab} use the current tab, otherwise the tab with + number {tab}. The first tab has number one. + Return zero if the window cannot be found. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->win_getid() + + +win_gettype([{nr}]) *win_gettype()* + Return the type of the window: + "autocmd" autocommand window. Temporary window + used to execute autocommands. + "command" command-line window |cmdwin| + (empty) normal window + "loclist" |location-list-window| + "popup" popup window |popup| + "preview" preview window |preview-window| + "quickfix" |quickfix-window| + "unknown" window {nr} not found + + When {nr} is omitted return the type of the current window. + When {nr} is given return the type of this window by number or + |window-ID|. + + Also see the 'buftype' option. When running a terminal in a + popup window then 'buftype' is "terminal" and win_gettype() + returns "popup". + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->win_gettype() +< +win_gotoid({expr}) *win_gotoid()* + Go to window with ID {expr}. This may also change the current + tabpage. + Return TRUE if successful, FALSE if the window cannot be found. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->win_gotoid() + +win_id2tabwin({expr}) *win_id2tabwin()* + Return a list with the tab number and window number of window + with ID {expr}: [tabnr, winnr]. + Return [0, 0] if the window cannot be found. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->win_id2tabwin() + +win_id2win({expr}) *win_id2win()* + Return the window number of window with ID {expr}. + Return 0 if the window cannot be found in the current tabpage. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->win_id2win() + +win_move_separator({nr}, {offset}) *win_move_separator()* + Move window {nr}'s vertical separator (i.e., the right border) + by {offset} columns, as if being dragged by the mouse. {nr} + can be a window number or |window-ID|. A positive {offset} + moves right and a negative {offset} moves left. Moving a + window's vertical separator will change the width of the + window and the width of other windows adjacent to the vertical + separator. The magnitude of movement may be smaller than + specified (e.g., as a consequence of maintaining + 'winminwidth'). Returns TRUE if the window can be found and + FALSE otherwise. + This will fail for the rightmost window and a full-width + window, since it has no separator on the right. + Only works for the current tab page. *E1308* + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->win_move_separator(offset) + +win_move_statusline({nr}, {offset}) *win_move_statusline()* + Move window {nr}'s status line (i.e., the bottom border) by + {offset} rows, as if being dragged by the mouse. {nr} can be a + window number or |window-ID|. A positive {offset} moves down + and a negative {offset} moves up. Moving a window's status + line will change the height of the window and the height of + other windows adjacent to the status line. The magnitude of + movement may be smaller than specified (e.g., as a consequence + of maintaining 'winminheight'). Returns TRUE if the window can + be found and FALSE otherwise. + Only works for the current tab page. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinnr()->win_move_statusline(offset) + +win_screenpos({nr}) *win_screenpos()* + Return the screen position of window {nr} as a list with two + numbers: [row, col]. The first window always has position + [1, 1], unless there is a tabline, then it is [2, 1]. + {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. Use zero + for the current window. + Returns [0, 0] if the window cannot be found in the current + tabpage. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->win_screenpos() +< +win_splitmove({nr}, {target} [, {options}]) *win_splitmove()* + Move the window {nr} to a new split of the window {target}. + This is similar to moving to {target}, creating a new window + using |:split| but having the same contents as window {nr}, and + then closing {nr}. + + Both {nr} and {target} can be window numbers or |window-ID|s. + Both must be in the current tab page. + + Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. + + {options} is a |Dictionary| with the following optional entries: + "vertical" When TRUE, the split is created vertically, + like with |:vsplit|. + "rightbelow" When TRUE, the split is made below or to the + right (if vertical). When FALSE, it is done + above or to the left (if vertical). When not + present, the values of 'splitbelow' and + 'splitright' are used. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->win_splitmove(target) +< + + *winbufnr()* +winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer + associated with window {nr}. {nr} can be the window number or + the |window-ID|. + When {nr} is zero, the number of the buffer in the current + window is returned. + When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. + Example: > + :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0)) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + FindWindow()->winbufnr()->bufname() +< + *wincol()* +wincol() The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the + cursor in the window. This is counting screen cells from the + left side of the window. The leftmost column is one. + + *windowsversion()* +windowsversion() + The result is a String. For MS-Windows it indicates the OS + version. E.g, Windows 10 is "10.0", Windows 8 is "6.2", + Windows XP is "5.1". For non-MS-Windows systems the result is + an empty string. + +winheight({nr}) *winheight()* + The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}. + {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is + returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. + An existing window always has a height of zero or more. + This excludes any window toolbar line. + Examples: > + :echo "The current window has " .. winheight(0) .. " lines." + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->winheight() +< +winlayout([{tabnr}]) *winlayout()* + The result is a nested List containing the layout of windows + in a tabpage. + + Without {tabnr} use the current tabpage, otherwise the tabpage + with number {tabnr}. If the tabpage {tabnr} is not found, + returns an empty list. + + For a leaf window, it returns: + ['leaf', {winid}] + For horizontally split windows, which form a column, it + returns: + ['col', [{nested list of windows}]] + For vertically split windows, which form a row, it returns: + ['row', [{nested list of windows}]] + + Example: > + " Only one window in the tab page + :echo winlayout() + ['leaf', 1000] + " Two horizontally split windows + :echo winlayout() + ['col', [['leaf', 1000], ['leaf', 1001]]] + " The second tab page, with three horizontally split + " windows, with two vertically split windows in the + " middle window + :echo winlayout(2) + ['col', [['leaf', 1002], ['row', [['leaf', 1003], + ['leaf', 1001]]], ['leaf', 1000]]] +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetTabnr()->winlayout() +< + *winline()* +winline() The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor + in the window. This is counting screen lines from the top of + the window. The first line is one. + If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated + first, this may cause a scroll. + + *winnr()* +winnr([{arg}]) The result is a Number, which is the number of the current + window. The top window has number 1. + Returns zero for a popup window. + + The optional argument {arg} supports the following values: + $ the number of the last window (the window + count). + # the number of the last accessed window (where + |CTRL-W_p| goes to). If there is no previous + window or it is in another tab page 0 is + returned. + {N}j the number of the Nth window below the + current window (where |CTRL-W_j| goes to). + {N}k the number of the Nth window above the current + window (where |CTRL-W_k| goes to). + {N}h the number of the Nth window left of the + current window (where |CTRL-W_h| goes to). + {N}l the number of the Nth window right of the + current window (where |CTRL-W_l| goes to). + The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" + |:wincmd|. + When {arg} is invalid an error is given and zero is returned. + Also see |tabpagewinnr()| and |win_getid()|. + Examples: > + let window_count = winnr('$') + let prev_window = winnr('#') + let wnum = winnr('3k') + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinval()->winnr() +< + *winrestcmd()* +winrestcmd() Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore + the current window sizes. Only works properly when no windows + are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is + unchanged. + Example: > + :let cmd = winrestcmd() + :call MessWithWindowSizes() + :exe cmd +< + *winrestview()* +winrestview({dict}) + Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore + the view of the current window. + Note: The {dict} does not have to contain all values, that are + returned by |winsaveview()|. If values are missing, those + settings won't be restored. So you can use: > + :call winrestview({'curswant': 4}) +< + This will only set the curswant value (the column the cursor + wants to move on vertical movements) of the cursor to column 5 + (yes, that is 5), while all other settings will remain the + same. This is useful, if you set the cursor position manually. + + If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable. + If the window size changed the result won't be the same. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetView()->winrestview() +< + *winsaveview()* +winsaveview() Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore + the view of the current window. Use |winrestview()| to + restore the view. + This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the + buffer and you want to go back to the original view. + This does not save fold information. Use the 'foldenable' + option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are + not opened when moving around. This may have side effects. + The return value includes: + lnum cursor line number + col cursor column (Note: the first column + zero, as opposed to what |getcurpos()| + returns) + coladd cursor column offset for 'virtualedit' + curswant column for vertical movement (Note: + the first column is zero, as opposed + to what |getcurpos()| returns). After + |$| command it will be a very large + number equal to |v:maxcol|. + topline first line in the window + topfill filler lines, only in diff mode + leftcol first column displayed; only used when + 'wrap' is off + skipcol columns skipped + Note that no option values are saved. + + +winwidth({nr}) *winwidth()* + The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}. + {nr} can be the window number or the |window-ID|. + When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is + returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. + An existing window always has a width of zero or more. + Examples: > + :echo "The current window has " .. winwidth(0) .. " columns." + :if winwidth(0) <= 50 + : 50 wincmd | + :endif +< For getting the terminal or screen size, see the 'columns' + option. + + Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetWinid()->winwidth() + + +wordcount() *wordcount()* + The result is a dictionary of byte/chars/word statistics for + the current buffer. This is the same info as provided by + |g_CTRL-G| + The return value includes: + bytes Number of bytes in the buffer + chars Number of chars in the buffer + words Number of words in the buffer + cursor_bytes Number of bytes before cursor position + (not in Visual mode) + cursor_chars Number of chars before cursor position + (not in Visual mode) + cursor_words Number of words before cursor position + (not in Visual mode) + visual_bytes Number of bytes visually selected + (only in Visual mode) + visual_chars Number of chars visually selected + (only in Visual mode) + visual_words Number of words visually selected + (only in Visual mode) + + + *writefile()* +writefile({object}, {fname} [, {flags}]) + When {object} is a |List| write it to file {fname}. Each list + item is separated with a NL. Each list item must be a String + or Number. + All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character. + Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list} + to writefile(). + + When {object} is a |Blob| write the bytes to file {fname} + unmodified, also when binary mode is not specified. + + {flags} must be a String. These characters are recognized: + + 'b' Binary mode is used: There will not be a NL after the + last list item. An empty item at the end does cause the + last line in the file to end in a NL. + + 'a' Append mode is used, lines are appended to the file: > + :call writefile(["foo"], "event.log", "a") + :call writefile(["bar"], "event.log", "a") +< + 'D' Delete the file when the current function ends. This + works like: > + :defer delete({fname}) +< Fails when not in a function. Also see |:defer|. + + 's' fsync() is called after writing the file. This flushes + the file to disk, if possible. This takes more time but + avoids losing the file if the system crashes. + + 'S' fsync() is not called, even when 'fsync' is set. + + When {flags} does not contain "S" or "s" then fsync() is + called if the 'fsync' option is set. + + An existing file is overwritten, if possible. + + When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0. There is an + error message if the file can't be created or when writing + fails. + + Also see |readfile()|. + To copy a file byte for byte: > + :let fl = readfile("foo", "b") + :call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b") + +< Can also be used as a |method|: > + GetText()->writefile("thefile") + + +xor({expr}, {expr}) *xor()* + Bitwise XOR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted + to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. + Also see `and()` and `or()`. + Example: > + :let bits = xor(bits, 0x80) +< + Can also be used as a |method|: > + :let bits = bits->xor(0x80) +< + +============================================================================== +3. Feature list *feature-list* + +There are three types of features: +1. Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim + was compiled |+feature-list|. Example: > + :if has("cindent") +< *gui_running* +2. Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met. + Example: > + :if has("gui_running") +< *has-patch* +3. Beyond a certain version or at a certain version and including a specific + patch. The "patch-7.4.248" feature means that the Vim version is 7.5 or + later, or it is version 7.4 and patch 248 was included. Example: > + :if has("patch-7.4.248") +< Note that it's possible for patch 248 to be omitted even though 249 is + included. Only happens when cherry-picking patches. + Note that this form only works for patch 7.4.237 and later, before that + you need to check for the patch and the v:version. Example (checking + version 6.2.148 or later): > + :if v:version > 602 || (v:version == 602 && has("patch148")) + +Hint: To find out if Vim supports backslashes in a file name (MS-Windows), +use: `if exists('+shellslash')` + + +acl Compiled with |ACL| support. +all_builtin_terms Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled. (always + true) +amiga Amiga version of Vim. +arabic Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|. +arp Compiled with ARP support (Amiga). +autocmd Compiled with autocommand support. (always true) +autochdir Compiled with support for 'autochdir' +autoservername Automatically enable |clientserver| +balloon_eval Compiled with |balloon-eval| support. +balloon_multiline GUI supports multiline balloons. +beos BeOS version of Vim. +browse Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will + work. +browsefilter Compiled with support for |browsefilter|. +bsd Compiled on an OS in the BSD family (excluding macOS). +builtin_terms Compiled with some builtin terminals. (always true) +byte_offset Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline' +channel Compiled with support for |channel| and |job| +cindent Compiled with 'cindent' support. (always true) +clientserver Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|. +clipboard Compiled with 'clipboard' support. +clipboard_working Compiled with 'clipboard' support and it can be used. +cmdline_compl Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support. +cmdline_hist Compiled with |cmdline-history| support. +cmdline_info Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support. +comments Compiled with |'comments'| support. +compatible Compiled to be very Vi compatible. +conpty Platform where |ConPTY| can be used. +cryptv Compiled with encryption support |encryption|. +cscope Compiled with |cscope| support. +cursorbind Compiled with |'cursorbind'| (always true) +debug Compiled with "DEBUG" defined. +dialog_con Compiled with console dialog support. +dialog_gui Compiled with GUI dialog support. +diff Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support. +digraphs Compiled with support for digraphs. +directx Compiled with support for DirectX and 'renderoptions'. +dnd Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|. +drop_file Compiled with |drop_file| support. +ebcdic Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set. +emacs_tags Compiled with support for Emacs tags. +eval Compiled with expression evaluation support. Always + true, of course! +ex_extra |+ex_extra| (always true) +extra_search Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and + |'hlsearch'| +farsi Support for Farsi was removed |farsi|. +file_in_path Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>| (always + true) +filterpipe When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell + read/write/filter commands +find_in_path Compiled with support for include file searches + |+find_in_path|. +float Compiled with support for |Float|. +fname_case Case in file names matters (for Amiga and MS-Windows + this is not present). +folding Compiled with |folding| support. +footer Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer| +fork Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system(). +gettext Compiled with message translation |multi-lang| +gui Compiled with GUI enabled. +gui_athena Compiled with Athena GUI (always false). +gui_gnome Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined). +gui_gtk Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version). +gui_gtk2 Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined). +gui_gtk3 Compiled with GTK+ 3 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined). +gui_haiku Compiled with Haiku GUI. +gui_mac Compiled with Macintosh GUI. +gui_motif Compiled with Motif GUI. +gui_photon Compiled with Photon GUI. +gui_running Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon. +gui_win32 Compiled with MS-Windows Win32 GUI. +gui_win32s idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1) +haiku Haiku version of Vim. +hangul_input Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul| +hpux HP-UX version of Vim. +iconv Can use iconv() for conversion. +insert_expand Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in + Insert mode. (always true) +job Compiled with support for |channel| and |job| +ipv6 Compiled with support for IPv6 networking in |channel|. +jumplist Compiled with |jumplist| support. (always true) +keymap Compiled with 'keymap' support. +lambda Compiled with |lambda| support. +langmap Compiled with 'langmap' support. +libcall Compiled with |libcall()| support. +linebreak Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat', 'showbreak' and + 'breakindent' support. +linux Linux version of Vim. +lispindent Compiled with support for lisp indenting. + (always true) +listcmds Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files| + and the argument list |arglist|. +localmap Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local| +lua Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|. +mac Any Macintosh version of Vim cf. osx +macunix Synonym for osxdarwin +menu Compiled with support for |:menu|. +mksession Compiled with support for |:mksession|. +modify_fname Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers| + (always true) +mouse Compiled with support for mouse. +mouse_dec Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse. +mouse_gpm Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse) +mouse_gpm_enabled GPM mouse is working +mouse_netterm Compiled with support for netterm mouse. +mouse_pterm Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse. +mouse_sysmouse Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse) +mouse_sgr Compiled with support for sgr mouse. +mouse_urxvt Compiled with support for urxvt mouse. +mouse_xterm Compiled with support for xterm mouse. +mouseshape Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'. +multi_byte Compiled with support for 'encoding' (always true) +multi_byte_encoding 'encoding' is set to a multibyte encoding. +multi_byte_ime Compiled with support for IME input method. +multi_lang Compiled with support for multiple languages. +mzscheme Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|. +nanotime Compiled with sub-second time stamp checks. +netbeans_enabled Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected. +netbeans_intg Compiled with support for |netbeans|. +num64 Compiled with 64-bit |Number| support. (always true) +ole Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32. +osx Compiled for macOS cf. mac +osxdarwin Compiled for macOS, with |mac-darwin-feature| +packages Compiled with |packages| support. +path_extra Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags' +perl Compiled with Perl interface. +persistent_undo Compiled with support for persistent undo history. +postscript Compiled with PostScript file printing. +printer Compiled with |:hardcopy| support. +profile Compiled with |:profile| support. +python Python 2.x interface available. |has-python| +python_compiled Compiled with Python 2.x interface. |has-python| +python_dynamic Python 2.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python| +python3 Python 3.x interface available. |has-python| +python3_compiled Compiled with Python 3.x interface. |has-python| +python3_dynamic Python 3.x interface is dynamically loaded. |has-python| +pythonx Python 2.x and/or 3.x interface available. |python_x| +qnx QNX version of Vim. +quickfix Compiled with |quickfix| support. +reltime Compiled with |reltime()| support. +rightleft Compiled with 'rightleft' support. +ruby Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|. +scrollbind Compiled with 'scrollbind' support. (always true) +showcmd Compiled with 'showcmd' support. +signs Compiled with |:sign| support. +smartindent Compiled with 'smartindent' support. (always true) +sodium Compiled with libsodium for better crypt support +sound Compiled with sound support, e.g. `sound_playevent()` +spell Compiled with spell checking support |spell|. +startuptime Compiled with |--startuptime| support. +statusline Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat' + and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'. +sun SunOS version of Vim. +sun_workshop Support for Sun |workshop| has been removed. +syntax Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|. +syntax_items There are active syntax highlighting items for the + current buffer. +system Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec(). +tag_binary Compiled with binary searching in tags files + |tag-binary-search|. (always true) +tag_old_static Support for old static tags was removed, see + |tag-old-static|. +tcl Compiled with Tcl interface. +termguicolors Compiled with true color in terminal support. +terminal Compiled with |terminal| support. +terminfo Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap. +termresponse Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|. +textobjects Compiled with support for |text-objects|. +textprop Compiled with support for |text-properties|. +tgetent Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap + or terminfo file. +timers Compiled with |timer_start()| support. +title Compiled with window title support |'title'|. + (always true) +toolbar Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|. +ttyin input is a terminal (tty) +ttyout output is a terminal (tty) +unix Unix version of Vim. *+unix* +unnamedplus Compiled with support for "unnamedplus" in 'clipboard' +user_commands User-defined commands. (always true) +vartabs Compiled with variable tabstop support |'vartabstop'|. +vcon Win32: Virtual console support is working, can use + 'termguicolors'. Also see |+vtp|. +vertsplit Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|. + (always true) +vim_starting True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup| + *vim_starting* +vim9script Compiled with |Vim9| script support +viminfo Compiled with viminfo support. +vimscript-1 Compiled Vim script version 1 support +vimscript-2 Compiled Vim script version 2 support +vimscript-3 Compiled Vim script version 3 support +vimscript-4 Compiled Vim script version 4 support +virtualedit Compiled with 'virtualedit' option. (always true) +visual Compiled with Visual mode. (always true) +visualextra Compiled with extra Visual mode commands. (always + true) |blockwise-operators|. +vms VMS version of Vim. +vreplace Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands. (always true) +vtp Compiled for vcon support |+vtp| (check vcon to find + out if it works in the current console). +wildignore Compiled with 'wildignore' option. +wildmenu Compiled with 'wildmenu' option. +win16 old version for MS-Windows 3.1 (always false) +win32 Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or + 64 bits) +win32unix Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin) +win64 Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit). +win95 Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME (always false) +winaltkeys Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option. +windows Compiled with support for more than one window. + (always true) +writebackup Compiled with 'writebackup' default on. +xfontset Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|. +xim Compiled with X input method support |xim|. +xpm Compiled with pixmap support. +xpm_w32 Compiled with pixmap support for Win32. (Only for + backward compatibility. Use "xpm" instead.) +xsmp Compiled with X session management support. +xsmp_interact Compiled with interactive X session management support. +xterm_clipboard Compiled with support for xterm clipboard. +xterm_save Compiled with support for saving and restoring the + xterm screen. +x11 Compiled with X11 support. + + +============================================================================== +4. Matching a pattern in a String *string-match* + +This is common between several functions. A regexp pattern as explained at +|pattern| is normally used to find a match in the buffer lines. When a +pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost everything works in the +same way. The difference is that a String is handled like it is one line. +When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a line break for the +pattern. It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or with ".". Example: +> + :let a = "aaaa\nxxxx" + :echo matchstr(a, "..\n..") + aa + xx + :echo matchstr(a, "a.x") + a + x + +Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and +"$" at the last character of the string. They don't match after or before a +"\n". + + vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: |